Home

Turbo iDDR User Guide

Contents

1. fez ss ov ES me gt Automation Front Panel System ONLY Control Protocol _ over Ethernet ge Remote Control E AppCenter Workstation HA m Device ee a Front Panel Set enn ee mouse and VGA monitor enon BVW AMP AppCenter Workstation Connect keyboard mouse and VGA monitor Local control modes Front panel mode ONLY The front panel includes a 320 by 240 TFT display with touch screen and VTR like transport controls The front panel user interface provides an on screen keyboard for text entry entering names and timecode An external keyboard connected to any USB port can be used for text entry or transport control using keyboard shortcuts A transport control device that emulates keyboard can be used to control the iDDR through keyboard shortcuts See Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control on page 49 AppCenter Workstation mode ONLY Connecting a keyboard mouse and VGA monitor provides access to AppCenter Workstation control application AppCenter comes pre installed and provides a graphical user interface for controlling the Turbo iDDR See Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation on page 113 In addition e The mouse is only used on the AppCenter user interface not the front panel app
2. L Verify video and audio input selection In the monitor pane check the thumbnail and its audio level indicators to verify the correct record channel inputs are seleccted If there is a problem correct the settings Verify video compression data rate You can manage storage capacity and video quality by adjusting the record channel compression data rate Generally set as high as possible to obtain the storage capacity needed Click Recorder in the AppCenter main menu then select Compressed Audio AC3 to toggle the setting Verify digital audio compression setting If the digital audio source uses AC3 encoding you must select AC3 mode otherwise select PCM encoding Click Recorder in the AppCenter main menu then select Compressed Audio AC3 to toggle the setting Verify the timecode source Make sure to select a valid timecode source You can use the internal timecode generator or LTC See Changing the timecode source on page 138 Verify widescreen mode setting If the video source is in widescreen format you must select widescreen mode for the recorder This attribute is saved with the clip and is used to control video scaling when the clip is played See Video scaling considerations on page 37 In AppCenter main menu click Recorder Widescreen 16 9 to toggle widescreen mode NOTE The clip aspect ratio cannot be changed once the clip is recorded If you want to change the clip
3. ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseees 115 Using AppCenter in workstation Control MOE cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeees 116 Enabling the workstation control MOCE cccccceeecececeeceeeeeeeeeeuaeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseess 116 Shutting down AppCenter and WINdOWS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaanenes 116 AppCenter user interface OVervieW c cceecccecccceceecaeeesecseeeeeeeeeeessaeaeaeeeeeeseess 118 Channel modes in App Genter eciceccreceaevechektceds n a a E baseeeks 120 ROOS IAD C CIEE secucacs ccc crzcoeesresetc tease parr a siecas he stahaescherecnodcosdsssemeseeteniesdeeonia 121 Conventions used in the AppCenter interface cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Terms and concepts used in AppCenter cccccceeeeceeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseees 123 Selecting the Channel mode aiene o aa a a 124 Using on screen transport CONTIOIS cccccseecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaesaeeeseeaees 124 Recording Cls neers a a a E 124 PDO UTE COMAIAG EDS sans A seater 125 Ab ut loop record Mde nenni E A E a a 125 Guide to using Recorder MOE ccccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeessaeasaeeseeeeeeeeessasaaaeeeseees 128 Before you record Recorder settings checklist ssessnnneseenrerrrreerrrrrreenrsenn 130 TO he CON PACU O eian a a ne 131 Using IEEE 1394 Record MOGe cccccssssseecceecceeeeeeceecaaseeceesaesaaaeeeeeessaneeeees 135 Previewing
4. Image PC VGA XGA For computer generated images files During import the image is etc gammaz corrected deflickered and resized to a title safe area Gama correction modifies mid range color tones leaving the extreme tones untouched Compensates for different PC monitors and their display characteristics The image is assumed to have square pixels HD 1920x1080 Images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout rate is 59 94Hz 59 94Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1920x1080 HD 1920x1080 The images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout 50 Hz rate is 50Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1920x1080 HD 1440x1080 Images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout rate is 59 94Hz 59 94Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1440x1080 HD 1440x1080 The images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout 50 Hz rate is 50Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1440x1080 Clip HD Imports the image file as an HD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting SD 4 3 Imports the image file as a 4 3 SD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting SD 16 9 Imports the image file as a 16 9 SD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting 200 Turbo iDDR User Guide About exporting media How should the image aspect ratio be converted Pad picture with Standard to Widescreen Widescreen to Standard n gt k cO LO i Crop picture to fit Standar
5. Verify video compression settings See Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on Choosing a video compression setting isa page 39 trade off between image quality and storage capacity Higher video quality produces larger files which take up more storage space and take longer to transfer to external devices Turbo iDDR User Guide 63 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 64 Features in the Recorder context menu The following table describes the tasks provided by the Recorder display context menu To do this Press the MENU button then select View the current clip properties Properties Rename the clip loaded in Recorder Rename This opens the text entry control which allows you to rename the current clip Renaming the clip creates a new seed name For example if you rename Clip_1 to Promo subsequent clips will be named Promo 1 Promo 2 and so on Locate and select the clip in the Clips display Locate Set or clear the widescreen attribute Widescreen Set this to match the active picture aspect ratio of the video source being recorded For example if your signal source active picture area is 16 9 select Widescreen if 4 3 delselect Widescreen Select a remote control protocol Remote Control Remote control that lets you select the BVW or AMP control protocols Open the Tools menu Tools Turbo iDDR User Guide To re
6. 00 2930 00 selection can be changed using the knob control or touch screen Selected Event Lifted Events Selected items that are lifted using the Lift menu item are displayed with the upper left corner folded over Lifted items can be moved using the knob control NOTE You can select more than one or more item using the multiple select feature In this way several items can be removed modified or moved in the same operation Time Cursor The time cursor indicates the current play position The time cursor is displayed over the event currently being played Drop Cursor The drop cursor appears as a dark vertical line between events when a lifted selection is being moved using the knob control The cursor indicates the location the lifted selection will be dropped when the knob is pushed in il a st Halloween 2 Meet the Pa 00 04 05 09 01 29 00 00 Turbo iDDR User Guide 89 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 90 Event Effects You can assign effects to events that are in the list Pause at end of event List playout pauses when the end of the event is reached a WW ee GPI Output trigger Triggers the selected GPI at beginning or end of Meet the Pa event O1 29 00 00 Up conversion amp Appears when the event s resolution does not match 7 the play channel video output type This icon indicates that the event is ae ai al going to be up converted For example a source with a XVGA res
7. Monitoring media file transfers Monitoring media file transfers The Transfer Monitor is used to monitor all 1DDR transfer jobs and their status A transfer job is created for each send to or import export operation Once created transfer jobs are added to the transfer job queue where they are dispatched in a first in first out basis Up to four transfer jobs can execute simultaneously Any additional jobs wait in the queue Topics in this section include Starting the Transfer Monitor Transfer Monitor pages and buttons Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer Monitor Viewing detailed transfer job properties Aborting a transfer job Removing transfer jobs from the completed list Turbo iDDR User Guide 207 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 208 Starting the Transfer Monitor To start Transfer Monitor perform one of the following Select File Transfer Monitor OYLr In the AppCenter Statusbar double click the Transfer Monitor button Be The Transfer Monitor button appears when a transfer job is present or pending Transfer Monitor pages and buttons In the Transfer Monitor transfer jobs are categorized and displayed on one of three pages Receiving Sending and Completed pages On each page the transfer jobs are displayed using a thumbnail image along with a brief description of its source destination and status Jobs that have encountered errors are shown in
8. Player 1 Unititk B Marks Kids 00 0560 00 Meet the Pa 01 29 00 00 List Time Dome Clip_9 00 00 30 00 Clip_10 00 29 30 00 00 00 05 00 Event Effects Player 1 Untitled List playing Selected Play Time Cursor Play Event Event Current play position 88 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using the Edit List display Control Description and User Operation Timecode Shows the recorded timecode for the event currently playing PT 02 13 03 17 Countdown Displays the time to the end of the current event 00705 30 00 List Monitor When in the event list display the progress bar represents the duration of the current event Event Thumbnail Audio indicator L Progress Bar Mark s Kids Event Name 00 05 30 00 Event Duration Event position In 00 00 00 00 i Event marks Que 00 00 05 000 List Button The list button provides information about a list including play progress and the list name and duration Play list play progress is displayed using the F Time Dome The Time Dome represents how much of the list has played An empty Time Dome indicates that the list has not started to play List_1 02 30 00 00 Events Events Events are the components that make up a list Events are created we by inserting clips into the list er Selected Events Events can be selected as well as the list button itself The Clip_10
9. Previewing a clip that is recording 5 After positioning the cue point on the IEEE 1394 device use one of the following methods to start recording e New Clip See Using New Clip record mode on page 131 e Crash Record See Using Crash record mode on page 131 e Fixed Length See Using Fixed Length record mode on page 132 6 Record continues until Stop is pressed Additional information about IEEE 1394 devices e When you start the recording the iDDR pre rolls the 1394 device several seconds then starts play back prior to capturing media This ensures the video frame cued in the channel monitor is recorded e There is no audio monitoring facility on the Turbo iDDR for 1394 devices To monitor audio use the audio monitoring features on the DV device e The timecode from the 1394 device is not recorded Rather the Turbo 1DDR starts striping timecode for the clip starting at zero e You can play the clip while it is still recording See Previewing a clip that is recording on page 137 e Depending on the device s native format media captured via IEEE 1394 may require transcoding If transcoding is required media may not be captured in real time Previewing a clip that is recording Preview loads the currently recording clip into a play channel The play channel becomes the selected channel and the clip is cued and ready for play To preview a clip 1 Start the record process 2 Preview the
10. 0e 0080 umj 2 Enter a timecode value then click OK or press Enter Alternatively Use the current position scrub bar luu in the timecode entry dialog box to locate the desired frame then click OK 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event click Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event click Insert to add the event to the list Using the event length control Entering a new event length moves the Event out point 1 Select the Length timecode entry control 2 Enter a new event length and click OK to close the Length dialog box 180 Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing and rearranging events in a playlist The event length changes by moving the event out point 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event click Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event click Insert to add the event to the list Clearing event marks Clearing an event mark resets the mark to the marks used in the source clip Event in is set to the mark in point of the source clip and event out is set to the mark out point of the source clip To clear an event mark do one of the following e With the event loaded in Event view click and hold the Event In or Event Out button then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu e With the event loaded in Event view select the Event In or Event Out timecode control and click Clear then OK to clear the mark
11. Moving events To the change the order of events in a list perform one of the following e In List View drag and drop the event into another location in the list e Select an event in List view then choose Move Up or Move Down buttons on the Playlist menu The event moves up or down one position in the list e Use the Edit menu to Copy Cut or Paste the event When you paste the event it is inserted after the currently selected event NOTE You can paste events that you copied from a list running on the other play channel Removing events To remove an event perform one of the following e Select the event in List view then press the Delete key on your keyboard e Select the event in List view right click then select Remove e Use the Edit menu to Cut the event e Right click on the event and select Cut Event Copying events To copy an event perform one of the following e Use the Edit menu to Copy the event e Righ click on the event and select Copy Event Renaming events To rename an event perform one of the following e Select the event in List view then select Playlist Properties Click on the name of Turbo iDDR User Guide 181 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation the event in the Properties dialog box and use the on screen keyboard to change the name click OK e Select the event in List view then switch to the Event View Select the Event name contro Event Clip_7 enter a new name and cli
12. Shows the audiometer display that contains the audio record level controls and the input meters Changes to the audio level are automatically saved for the channel Turbo iDDR User Guide 61 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 62 Before you record Recorder settings checklist Before recording check the following recorder channel settings Record Channel Setting Procedure o Verify video and audio input selection In the monitor pane check the thumbnail and its audio level indicators to verify the correct record channel inputs are seleccted If there is a problem correct the settings See Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 Verify video compression data rate You can manage storage capacity and video quality by adjusting the record channel compression data rate Generally set as high as possible to obtain the storage capacity needed See Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 Verify digital audio compression setting If the digital audio source uses AC3 encoding you must select AC3 mode otherwise select PCM encoding See Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 Verify the timecode source Make sure to select a valid timecode source You can use the internal timecode generator or LTC See Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 Verify widescreen mode setting If the video source is in wi
13. Editing a clip on page 77 e Creating Subclips on page 80 e Locating the clip loaded in player on page 82 e Viewing clip properties on page 82 Turbo iDDR User Guide About playing clips About playing clips The front panel player display is used to play clips programs and playlists stored on the iDDR The player display is also used to trim clips by modifying the clip mark in or mark out points There is a player display for each play channel P1 and P2 The player display has two additional views Edit List and Subclip Edit List is used to create playlists by loading multiple clips or programs to create sequence of events Subclip view is used to create new clips from the source clip currently loaded in the player display Later you can delete the source clip to free media storage space The media referenced by subclips remains Working with clips that are still recording The following restrictions apply when working with a clip in Player mode that is currently recording e You cannot rename the clip e The clip mark in mark out points cannot be modified e Subclips created from a clip currently being recorded can only have a Mark Out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a clip longer than has been recorded under the assumption that the unrecorded frames will fill it in Otherwise clips that are currently being recorded behave normally
14. In the Organize Bins dialog box select a disk volume then click New Bin W Organize Bins per default Type Bin New Bin Explore Therns 35 Created 04 27 05 12 24 PM 2 Enter the new bin name then click OK 3 Close the Organize Bins dialog box 222 Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with assets Deleting a bin 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select Organize Bins In the Organize Bins dialog box choose the bin you want to delete Click the Delete button Deleted bins and assets are moved to the Recycle Bin unless the Remove items immediately when deleted option is set for the Recycle Bin see Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 230 Holding down the SHIFT key during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin NOTE You cannot delete a bin containing assets that are locked or in use However the unlocked assets in the bin will be deleted 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box 5 Close the Organize Bins dialog box Renaming a bin l In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label Lookin default then select Organize Bins In the Organize Bins dialog box choose the bin you want to rename then click Rename Edit the bin name then click OK Asset names can contain up to 32 characters including spaces Spaces count as two characters and the following characters are not allowed lt gt single quote
15. SMPTE 360M gxf Microsoft AVI avi 3 Click File then locate and select the destination directory The Save in label shows the current destination The list under the Save in label displays the contents of the current destination You can select items in the list such as a machine disk drive or folder to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Save in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent target locations used history Turbo iDDR User Guide To export media 4 Use the File Type drop down list to select the file format MPEG File mpg SMPTE 360M exf Microsoft AVI avi Windows Media wmv 5 If desired modify the destination file name using the File Name File Name MyClip control 6 Click Send edit 7 If you chose Microsoft AVI avi file format you must select encoder type then click OK to export Mi Send V default ps3 Destination Save in F movies v E Footagemp File Name MyClip File Type MPEG File mpq MPEG File mpq SMPTE 360M qxF Microsoft AVI avi Windows Media wmy Format Export Settings Comment Microsoft Video 1 none Uncompressed none Microsoft DV Interleaved Type 1 Exports a Type 1 AVI file which contains a standard DV bit stream where the video and audio streams interlace
16. The Look in label shows the current location The list under the Look in label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list such as a machine disk drive or folder to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Look in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent source locations visited history 5 Verify the destination directory indicated next to Bin Name This is where the imported file is placed 6 Modify the clip name if needed by selecting the Clip Name edit control 7 Click Import The Importing dialog box is displayed Turbo iDDR User Guide 199 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation E Importing F AppCenter Player gif How should this image be interpreted First of a numbered sequence Fixed duration 00 00 10 00 What are the source and target formats Image Po YGA KGA etc Bottom Field First Clip HD How should mismatched images be converted Pad picture with black bars Crop picture to fit Cancel Refer to the following table to choose import options How should this image be interpreted First of a numbered sequence Select if importing a still image to be displayed for a fixed period of time Fixed duration Select if importing the first of a set of sequentially numbered files What are the source and target formats
17. Toggles the E to E mode on and off See Selecting E to E mode on page 76 K Eject Ejects the current clip HE t Subclip Shows the Subclip display for creating new clips from the current clip loaded Edit List Shows the Edit List display for viewing assets loaded as a sequence of events in a playlist Shows the audio meter panel for adjusting audio play level Changes to the audio level can be saved with the current clip Turbo iDDR User Guide 73 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 74 Features in the player context menu The following table describes the tasks provided by the Player display context menu Menu Item Description Properties Opens the Clip Property dialog or if a Playlist was loaded or is being edited it opens the List Property dialog Rename Opens the text entry control which allows you to rename the current clip Locate Opens the Clip display and selects the current asset If editing an unnamed list then an error is shown in the statusbar Goto Opens the timecode keypad and cues the timeline position to the given timecode Now Loads the clip the currently loaded in R1 into the current player Recording Change Changes the asset s thumbnail to the current frame Thumbnail Stripe Opens the Stripe Timecode control that allows you to replace clip time code using Timecode stripe zero based or time
18. Turbo iDDR User Guide 149 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Playing a clip Once a clip is loaded in Player mode you can play the clip or search for a specific frame of video using the transport controls Use the links in the following table to find information on playing clips If you are using Refer to Front Panel controls Using the front panel controls on page 51 On screen transport controls Using on screen transport controls on page 124 Keyboard shortcuts Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 GPI input triggers Setting GPI input triggers on page 43 Selecting loop play Loop play allows the clip to play in a continuous loop until Stop is pressed The Time Dome is used to enable disable loop play e Click the Time Dome D then choose Loop Mode in the pop up menu 00 00 03 23 Selecting E to E mode In E to E mode the record channel inputs are switched to the play channel audio and video outputs standard definition when the play channel is in stop mode or when no clip is loaded This allows you to monitor the record channel inputs while recording To enable E to E mode e Inthe AppCenter Workstation main menu select Player then E to E The following table describes play channel operation depending on the E to E selection E to E Setting Play channel mode Play channel output E to E Disabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show c
19. double quote and at the beginning of the name NOTE If the renamed bin contains assets that are locked or in use two bins will appear after renaming one with the new name and one with the old name containing the problem asset 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog box Working with assets Assets displayed in the Asset List include clips subclips playlists and programs Refer to the following procedures to work with assets Renaming an asset on page 224 Selecting multiple assets on page 224 Moving an asset to another bin on page 224 Copying an asset on page 225 Deleting an asset on page 227 Erasing a clip s unused media on page 228 Locking an asset on page 229 Turbo iDDR User Guide 223 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Renaming an asset 1 Select the asset in the Asset List 2 Select Rename using one of the following e Select Clips Rename or e Select Rename in the asset context menu or e Click the Rename button in the Clips Pane If the Rename button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The rename dialog box appears 3 Edit the asset name then click OK Asset names can contain up to 32 characters including spaces Spaces count as two characters and the following characters are not allowed lt gt single quote double quote and at the begi
20. on page 155 Moving clip marks Using the In Out buttons 1 Use the transport controls to locate the desired frame 2 In Control view click In ns to set mark in point or click Out Out to set mark out point 3 In the Confirm Mark Change window click Yes Moving clip marks Using the timecode entry controls 1 In Control view select the mark in or mark out timecode contro 00 01 11 09 to open the timecode entry dialog box E Mark In 02 Clear Back Cancel j 2 Enter a timecode value then click OK or press Enter Alternatively Use the current position scrub bar jjiiii in the timecode entry dialog box to locate the desired frame then select OK Moving clip marks Using the clip length control Entering a new clip length moves the mark out point 1 Click the Length timecode entry control 2 Enter a new clip length and click OK The clip length changes by moving the mark out point Turbo iDDR User Guide 155 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 156 Clearing mark in mark out points Clearing a mark point resets the mark to it s default position mark in is set to the beginning of available media mark out is set to the last frame of available media To clear a mark point do one of the following e In Play view click and hold the In or Out button then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu e In Play view select the mark in or the mark out timecode control and cl
21. Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation You must configure an iDDR network adapter prior to using the Send to stream feature Refer to Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection on page 271 then return to this procedure 1 In the Clips Pane select the asset s you want to transfer 2 Open the Send to dialog box using one of the following steps e Select Clips Send to or e Right click the clip and select Send to The Send to dialog box appears send V default Clip_ 1 x Destination Stream to iVDR 2IV defaut 03 18 03 11 22 AM O Mvideo 03 21 03 08 39 AM w Recycle Bin Bin Name Short Clips o o o o 3 Click Stream then locate and select the stream destination The Stream to label shows the current destination The list under the Stream to label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list a machine disk volume or a bin to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Stream to drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent target devices history 4 Click Send to transfer the asset s NOTE Send to stream is a background task and can be monitored using the iDDR Transfer Monitor tool See Monitoring media file transfers on page 124 If the operation fails for any reason the asset is deleted from the target location 206 Turbo iDDR User Guide
22. Editing a clip Topics in this section are as follows e Moving clip mark in mark out points on page 77 e Clearing clip marks on page 78 e Adjusting clip audio level on page 78 e Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 79 e Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 79 e Renaming a clip in player mode on page 80 Moving clip mark in mark out points Every clip has a mark in point and a mark out point which refer to the first and last frames displayed when the clip is played When first recorded clip marks are set to the beginning and end of available media You can edit the clip marks in order to reference only the desired media When clip marks are moved the unused media is not deleted Clearing the marks resets the them to the first and last frames of the recorded clip The following restrictions apply when editing clip marks e Mark in must precede the mark out e Marks cannot be set outside the recorded media e Marks cannot be changed on a clip that is still being recorded Turbo iDDR User Guide 77 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control NOTE If more media exists after the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed next to the In Out timecode To permanently remove media outside the marks refer to Erasing a clip s unused media on page 107 To move clip marks 1 Load the clip in the player 2 Use the front transport controls to locate the desi
23. Of the three channels there is always one selected channel When a channel is selected the channel is displayed with a white background in the channel pane The front panel transport controls and keyboard are delegated to controlling the selected channel There are three ways to select the channel pressing a channel select button on the front panel selecting a channel in the monitor pane or pressing a keyboard shortcut Changing the channel selection does not disrupt other channels they continue to operate in the background Channel mode Channels in AppCenter are always in one mode or another Each mode has its own set of buttons lists controls and other characteristics relative to the operations performed in that mode The name of the mode for the channel is displayed in the channel s monitor pane which is also where you can change the mode for the channel Selecting the channel mode on page 124 Assignable buttons Some buttons are assignable which means that you can change the action associated with the button to better suit your workflow Right clicking a button causes a pop menu to appear which lists the alternative button choices for that button Clip thumbnail Used for visual identification of a clip By default the thumbnail is generated from the 16th frame of video You can select a new thumbnail using Player If no thumbnail is available an icon is displayed showing there is no thumbnail Volume The
24. Search Vi Created Last 3 Days 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a bin The bin properties are displayed in the Organize Bins dialog box 244 Turbo iDDR User Guide Viewing asset properties W Organize Bins Z7 default New Bin Type Bin Explore Items 34 Created 04 27 05 12 24 PM Viewing volume properties 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a disk volume The volume properties are displayed in the Organize Bins dialog box Organize Bins Dv CEED even Type volume Recycle Bin Used Space 60449 ME SPOTS Explore Free Space 44547 MB default Current Total Space 104996 MB newsclips Turbo iDDR User Guide 245 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Monitoring the system using the StatusBar The StatusBar located across the bottom of the AppCenter window is used to display system and applications messages In addition the StatusBar includes several tool buttons as described in the following table Player 2 Playing List_10 Section 1 Clip_ Status Messages Protocol StatusPane i Button aa Transfer Monitor Button Tool Name Description Protocol Monitor This button appears when a channel is configured for remote control using a remote control protocol application The Protocol Monitor button flashes when any protocol is successfully receiving serial co
25. VAR speed increment period Press for VAR play mode then repeat to increment VAR speed VAR speed decrement comma Press for VAR play mode then repeat to decrement VAR speed Stop Mode transport controls For this action Press Cue to mark in A Shift I Cue to mark out S Shift O Next frame Arrow right Previous frame Arrow left Go forward 1 second Shift Arrow right Go back 1 second Shift Arrow left Mark Point and Cue controls For this action Press Set mark in I Set mark out O Clear mark in Ctrl I Clear mark out Ctrl O urbo iDDR User Guide 283 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Miscellaneous controls Action Press Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Paste Ctrl V Display split screen mode with Clips pane tom E Open online help List controls The following shortcuts are used to control lists such as text view in Clips pane or Playlist s List view Action Press Select previous item in list Up arrow Select next item in list Down arrow Scroll to previous page Page Up Scroll to next page Page Down Scroll to top of list Home Scrolls to bottom of list End Delete current selection Delete Backspace Playlist controls Action Press Next event Shift S Ctrl S Ctrl Arrow right Previous event Shift A Ctrl A Ctrl
26. e The event out timecode is set to the last recorded frame at the time the clip is inserted in List view or created in Event view You can move the event out timecode as needed while the clip is still recording or after record is stopped Inserting a playlist in a playlist workarounds While 1DDR does not support a true nested playlist you can retain some of the functionality of inserting a playlist in a playlist in the following ways These are available in workstation operating mode only Turbo iDDR User Guide 87 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control e Save the list as a program then insert it into another playlist as an event e Use multi item select and copy paste e Copy paste events or sections within the same list or from other lists e Copy the list in the clips pane then load and edit the list Guide to using the Edit List display To open the Edit List display use the Edit List button in the Player display The following describes the controls in the Edit List display Player Display Clip 7 00 00 0S 00 laaf il In OOOO OU uc 00 000S 00 Player 1 Clip_ Edit List with 1 event A single clip presented as a list with 1 event PT 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 MIO Q Current Clip 7 Untitled Event 00 00 05 00 R lofi Monitor Edit List with 4 events List is automatically created when a second clip is inserted In 00 00 00 00 ut 00 00 05 00
27. on page 261 e Guide to AMP Player Local Protocol mode on page 263 e Using AMP Recorder Local control tasks on page 264 e Using AMP Player Local control tasks on page 265 e Using front panel transport controls on page 268 e Monitoring remote control communications on page 268 Enabling remote control from Workstation mode You can configure a channel for remote control operation from Workstation mode If the channel is in use at the time all channel activity is terminated and the current media is ejected prior to switching to remote control mode This procedure contains two sections e Select a control protocol on page 255 e Select the control port and control mode on page 255 Select a control protocol 1 If the Channel Pane is not already in split screen view select View Split Screen 2 In the monitor pane click the control mode drop down list Player list for the channel then choose a remote protocol The channel changes to remote control mode and becomes the selected channel 3 Proceed to Select the control port and control mode Select the control port and control mode After enabling remote control mode you must select a control port and control mode Protocol control only or Local and Protocol control 1 Click the channel monitor in the Monitor Pane 2 In AppCenter Workstation main menu click Player or Recorder as appropriate then choose Options
28. recording No clip loaded System Error Media disks are full Cannot record the clip Message The system drive is at full capacity Disk recorder operations will fail Delete unused or temporary assets and restart disk recorder Interpreting the Status Icon When a message is written to the status log a Status Icon is displayed in the Status Bar indicating the severity of the message Status Name Description Bar Icon fe Information All warnings and alert messages have been cleared NOTE Messages are cleared using the System Status Display See Viewing iDDR system log messages on page 111 A Warning There is at least one warning message and no alert messages G Alert There is at least one uncleared alert message Viewing iDDR system log messages The System Status Display is used to view all messages in the system log The System Status Display provides a central message area where status messages are listed System Status Display Topics e Opening the System Status Display e Showing iDDR software versions e Clearing messages Opening the System Status Display e To open the System Status Display press the MENU button then use the control knob to scroll and select Tools then select System Status Turbo iDDR User Guide 111 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Channel System PFa Label Software Storage Version Indicator P1 System v1 0 0 0 Li 725 04 2 01 A
29. Adding and removing sections A playlist has as least one section but can have up to 100 sections All events belong to a section and each section can have up to 1000 events To add a section e In List view select Playlist Add Section The new section is inserted at the end of the list e Use the Edit menu to Cut Copy or Paste a section When you paste the section it is inserted after the currently selected section NOTE You can paste a section that you copied from a list running on the other play channel e Right click on the section and select Cut Copy or Paste To remove a section perform one of the following e Select the section in the list right click and select Remove e Use the Edit menu to Cuta section e Select the section in List view then click the Remove button This button only appears in full screen viewing mode Moving and copying sections To the change the order of sections in a list perform one of the following e Drag and drop the section into another location in the list e Select an section in List view then select Playlist Move Up or Move Down The section moves up or down one position in the list e Use the Edit menu in the AppCenter toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts to Cut Copy or Paste the section When you paste the section it is inserted after the currently selected section NOTE You can paste sections that you copied from a list running on the other play channel e Right cli
30. Open the Bins display using one of the following e Press CLIPS twice or e Press CLIPS P then press MENU So and choose Organize Bins Turbo iDDR User Guide 105 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Beauty Shoe default Recycle Bin Player 1 Clip cued 2 Press MENU oh then choose New Bin 3 Use the text entry control or an external keyboard to name the bin Renaming a bin 1 Open the Bins display using one of the following e Press CLIPS twice or e Press CLIPS f then press ME NU oh and choose Organize Bins 2 Press MENU oh then choose Rename 3 Use the text entry control or an external keyboard to rename the bin then touch Done or press Enter on the external keyboard Deleting a bin 1 Open the Bins display using one of the following e Press CLIPS twice or e Press CLIPS f then press ME NU oh and choose Organize Bins 2 Press MENU oh then choose Delete Deleted bins are moved to the Recycle Bin unless it is bypassed See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 109 Holding down the SHIFT key during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin NOTE You cannot delete a bin containing assets that are locked or in use However the unlocked assets in the bin will be deleted 106 Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with assets Working with assets Assets include clips subclips playlists and programs The following table describes how to perform commo
31. R1 settings on page 39 Missing or intermittent LTC timecode If LTC is the selected timecode source and the LTC signal is missing 1 e LTC not connected the current timecode display shows XX XX XX XX Also clips recorded without timecode will show no mark in mark out timecode after recording When LTC is detected but the signal is intermittent the last valid timecode 1s displayed anytime the LTC signal disappears Clips with missing or intermittent timecode will show this behavior during playback in a play channel If LTC is intermittent or missing try one of the following solutions e Use the internal timecode generator as the timecode source for recording e Stripe the timecode after the clip is recorded using the Player application See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 66 Using the video input noise reduction filter The video input noise reduction filter provides pre filtering to enhance the picture quality Re recording and appending clips is not supported through the user interface You cannot record over a previously recorded clip To replace the unwanted clip delete it and record a new one Also appending previously recorded clips is not supported that is once the recording is stopped you cannot start the recording again using the same clip If a clip is currently loaded when record is selected the clip is ejected and a new clip is created before recording begins NOTE Appending
32. Refer to the Turbo iDDR Service Manual for procedures Shutdown Shutdown the Windows operating system and power off the iDDR Turbo iDDR User Guide 117 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation AppCenter user interface overview Monitor pane Displays channel status information This menu changes for the current channel mode These buttons control channel Local P1 b operations Subclip R Goto P2 A drop down list here selects the channel s Subclip mode XXIXXIXXIXX lt no clip loaded gt te Player 1 Clip 2 play g 1 00x T Click anywhere in the Monitor pane or Channel Control pane to select a channel TERR Clip Clip_6 Location Local default E 00 00 00 00 00 01 22 00 00 01 22 08 16 15 00 16 Channel pane Displays channels in their current control modes Clips pane Displays media stored on media disks Lookin V defaut Load In Out Length Search a a These button New Bin control media gt gt le CK 4 00 00 09 20 re 5 In Out Length 90 00 07 06 90 00 18 03 90 00 10 27 00 00 08 11 eee gt gt gt oi management operations Clip Siba o Delete B Location CHONGOENGB12 default aa These tabs switch views for the chann CI CIES OLD pgs P Clip gno clip loaded gt C In Out Length Load On screen transport con duplicat
33. Turbo iDDR User Guide 59 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Guide to using the front panel Recorder display The Recorder display is shown when the R1 panel button is pressed The following describes the controls in the Recorder display interface R1 00 00 03 27 00 00 27 09 MII Monitor a Thumbnail P Loop Record 7 d Length JL re clip 13 jap Recor xed Leng Buttons Progress Ceo Bar WildeFault In o0 00 00 00 Muk IEEE 1394 oo 00 03 21 J New cle wecorder 1 Clip_13 recording Control Description and User Operation Clip Properties Control Monitor A clip thumbnail is displayed for the current clip to visually identify the clip The thumbnail is generated from the 16th frame of the clip An empty monitor is used when no clip is loaded Once recording begins a thumbnail is shown using the 16 frame of video During a loop record a new thumbnail is generated every 3 minute once the loop record length is reached A gray image with the text no video is shown when the Recorder is not Mo receiving a video signal An empty monitor with a black X is used if a thumbnail cannot be created There may be a problem with recording the input video 7 When the recorder is in IEEE 1394 record mode the 1394 symbol is r displayed on the when playback stops Audio meters Small audio meter bars are shown in the lower right corner of the gz thumbnail Due to their
34. You can organize your media by creating and removing bins When recording starts the new clip is stored in the current bin You can change the current bin to determine where you want the clip stored The current bin name is displayed under the clip name in the Recorder display for example V default NOTE Changing the current bin affects the recorder and the player modes To change the current bin for the record channel 1 Press CLIPS f then use the control knob to choose Organize Bins You can also press CLIPS twice to view the Bins The Bin display appears Beauty Archive Shote i a yal VYJ Recycle Bin Player 1 Clip cued 68 Turbo iDDR User Guide Renaming a clip 2 Do one of the following e Use the control knob to highlight and select a bin to make it the current bin or e Touch a bin button to select it then touch it again to view the bin The selected bin is now the current bin 3 Press R1 to return to the Recorder display Related topics e Creating a new bin on page 105 e Renaming a bin on page 106 Renaming a clip You can rename a clip during or after recording To rename a clip 1 Press MENU So then use the control knob to choose Rename 2 Use the onscreen keyboard to rename the clip then select Done Viewing clip properties To view the properties of a clip loaded in Recorder mode 1 Press MENU So then use the control knob to choose Properties The pr
35. a System Timing Internal reference provides accurate free running timing signals in the absence of genlock reference to allow asynchronous record and play Characteristics Description Nominal Playback Output Delay Adjustable Default Zero timed to reference Output Delay Range Frames NTSC 0 to 1 frames Independent for each play PAL 0 to 3 frames channel Lines NTSC 525 lines 0 to 524 lines PAL 625 lines 0 to 624 lines Samples NTSC 525 lines 0 to 1715 clock samples PAL 625 lines 0 to 1727 clock samples Analog sub pixels SC gt analog video only Range is slightly more than one sample clock period Nominal E to E Output Delay NA E to E is provided for monitoring purposes only not intended as a program switch a All delay values shown are relative to Black Reference bi Output delay adjustments affect the SDI and composite analog outputs together The analog sub pixel adjustment is only a fine trim on the composite output with respect to the current SDI timing 292 Turbo iDDR User Guide S PDIF Digital Audio S PDIF Digital Audio Parameter Specification Standard IEC 60958 Compressed AC 3 or PCM Connector BNC Input Impedance 75 ohms unbalanced Copyright Protection If the audio input material has the copy protection status bit turned on the audio input is muted Also warning symbol is displayed in the Status
36. e Click Player Create All In some cases a progress dialog is displayed as the clips are generated Each subclip is terminated using the mark out of the source clip Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating the clip loaded in player Locating the clip loaded in player You can determine where the currently loaded clip is stored in the media file system using the locate command To locate the currently loaded clip e Select Player Locate The Clips pane opens and displays the contents of the bin where the clip is located Viewing clip properties To view the properties of a clip loaded in Player e Click the Properties button or e Select Player Properties NOTE To learn more about the Clip Properties dialog box Viewing clip properties on page 242 Turbo iDDR User Guide 161 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 162 Working with playlists Information in this section includes Introducing Playlist mode on page 163 Before using Playlist mode on page 164 Selecting Playlist mode on page 167 Guide to using Playlist mode List View on page 167 Guide to using Playlist mode Event View on page 170 Selecting Text or Thumbnail view on page 173 Selecting monitor information on page 173 Creating a simple playlist on page 174 Inserting media in a playlist on page 174 Playing a list on page 177 Editing and rearranging events in a playlist
37. on page 178 Managing sections in a list on page 183 Adding play effects on page 185 Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 190 Managing playlists on page 191 Saving a list as a program on page 195 Turbo iDDR User Guide Introducing Playlist mode Introducing Playlist mode In addition to playing single a single clip the 1DDR play channels can also play lists that contain clips and programs stored on the 1DDR Playlist mode is supported in both front panel and workstation operating modes however workstation operation extends the playlist features available The following table summarizes and compares the basic features supported in playlist mode for both front panel and workstation operation Basic Feature Description Availability FrontPanel Workstation Mode Mode Editing playlists Events ina playlist can be rearranged or removed y Y and new events added between existing ones Editing events in Events can be renamed and trimmed Trimming y the list an event moves the mark in and mark out points This only affects the event not the source clip Event transitions Transitions between all events in a listis a cut i e Y va the last frame of an event is followed by the first frame of the next event Loop on a Sections are provided within the list to provide va section flexibility during playout A section can be set up to loop indefinitely The section can
38. stream Turbo iDDR User Guide Before using Playlist mode Using mixed aspect ratios in a playlist The iDDR can play clips with different aspect ratios in a single playlist How the media is displayed is determined by the play channel widescreen setting and clip aspect ratio The play channel determines the clip aspect ratio by examining the clip aspect ratio attribute set when the clip was recorded The following table describes how the iDDR displays mixed aspect ratios See also Video scaling considerations on page 37 Event Aspect Ratio Play Channel Widescreen Setting Standard 4 3 Widescreen 16 9 Standard 4 3 No conversion Bars O Pillarbox o O Bars amp Crop Half Pillarbox a C Crop zoom a O Widescreen 16 9 Bars No conversion Letterbox Bars amp Crop Half letterbox bOd O Using mixed video resolutions in a single playlist Playlists can contain events with different video resolutions When the list is played the media is up converted or down converted as needed to match the play channel video output type selected See also Video scaling considerations on page 37 NOTE The transition between events with different resolutions takes approximately I second During this time play channel output is switched to black Inserting a clip that is still recording Clips that are currently recording behave as other clips do in a list except for the following restriction
39. to be searched Search results will only include the selected types Look in V default Find items of the following type Advanced v Clips Programs Lists Cancel 3 Once you have selected the search criteria click OK to start the search The search results are displayed in the Clips Pane The text in the Current Bin control is replaced with a brief summary of the search For example Search movie indicates all the clips programs and lists with names like moviel movie2 or Search Created Last 5 Days for assets created in the last 5 days Cook mi ge o orne EEE E Sa Clip_1 05 27 03 04 39 PM Load Q P Clip_2 05 27 03 04 39 PM Properti Clip_3 05 27 03 04 44 PM Search Turbo iDDR User Guide 233 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Viewing recent search results The last four search results are retained You can view the most recent search results using the Current Bin label e Select the Current Bin label then choose a search result Organize Bins default Recycle Bin mbir Search Ws clip Search Wi Created Last 3 Days Using Advanced Search The Search dialog box provides the advanced search mode which provides an extended set of attributes for locating assets anywhere in the iDDR media storage 1 Open the Search dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Clips Search or e Click the Search button in the Clips Pane If the Search button is n
40. 109 Video Message SDI video present Details SD video source detected on channel A1 2 05702 2005 19 01 37 092 video Message SDI video lost Details SDI video source lost on channel Al Black video might be recorded Check video SOUIce i 05 02 2005 19 01 37 343 Video Message SDI video present Details SD video source detected on channel A1 A 05 02 2005 19 02 14 328 Video Message SDI video lost Details SDI video source lost on channel A1 Black video might be recorded Check viden source i 05 02 2005 19 02 14 593 Video Message SDI video present Details SD video source detected on channel A1 A 05702 2005 19 02 31 328 Video Message SDI video lost Detalls SDI video source lost on channel Al Black wideo might be recorded Check video SOUIce i 05 02 2005 19 04 31 577 Video Message SDI video present Details SD video source detected on channel A1 Showing iDDR software versions e Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Show Versions Software versions are displayed Managing messages in the Status Pane All messages are listed in the Status Pane You may find it necessary to use the utilities found in the Status Pane menu to manage messages that appear in the Status Pane Copying messages to the clip board 1 Select the messages in the StatusPane 2 Click Copy After copying the message it can be pasted using standard Windows techniques Clearing messages Clearing messages from the Statu
41. 1x speed forward direction only RS 422 specification The RS 422 interface conforms to ANSI SMPTE 207M 1997 standard SMPTE 422 GPI I O specifications Characteristics Description Number of Inputs Outputs 6 inputs 6 outputs 1 common ground Connector type 15pin D GPI Input Inputs set to TTL level high 2 4 5V External current sink Ima Compatible with 5 volts CMOS TTL open collector or contact closures GPI Output Outputs are open drain drivers Max voltage when outputs are open 30V Max current when outputs are closed 100ma Typical risetimes approximately 625ns Typical falltimes approximately 400ns IEEE 1394A interface specification The following table describes the input requirements for the optional IEEE 1394A interface Characteristics Description Standard IEEE 1394A for import of video and audio from a digital recording device NOTE The iDDR record channel transport controls can be used to control the remote device play stop fast forward rewind goto timecode Port Assignments Any of the ports 1 3 can be used for making a connection to a IEEE 1394 device NOTE The top port on the rear panel and the front panel port are electrically the same Use only one port at a time Video Requirements DV DV25 video HDV MPEG 2 MP H14L Audio Channels 2 channels 16 bit 48KHz Timecode Device timecode input is no
42. 2000 IEC 950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third edition 1999 EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third Edition 2000 17 Safety Summaries 18 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 1 Product Introduction Information in the chapter includes e Product overview and key features e Functional description e Media disk space How media is stored e Front panel controls and indicators e Rear panel connectors e Turbo 1iDDR control modes e Power on and shutting down e Accessing the Windows operating system Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 1 Product Introduction 20 Product overview and key features The Turbo iDDR is a multi channel digital video recorder that allows simultaneous record and playback of media stored on internal disk drives The Turbo 1DDR features a single record channel R1 and two play channels P1 P2 Hours of storage depends on the video compression settings selected The front panel touch screen and TFT display along with front panel transport controls allow easy operation and monitoring with minimal external connections The 1DDR also provides a built in digital disk recorder application AppCenter Workstation This application is available when you connect a keyboard mouse and VGA monitor to the iDDR rear panel The Workstation applicati
43. AN WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life AN CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to equipment or other property or which may cause equipment crucial to your business environment to become temporarily non operational Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking WARNING indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product AN DANGER high voltage a Protective ground earth terminal AN ATTENTION refer to manual 14 Turbo iDDR User Guide Service Safety Summary Service Safety Summary A WARNING The service instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries before performing service Do Not Service Alone Disconnect Power Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present To avoid electric shock disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or if provided the p
44. Arrow left Next section Shift Ctrl S Shift Ctrl Arrow right Previous section Shift Ctrl A Shift Ctrl Arrow left Goto an event Hold down the Alt key while clicking the event 284 Turbo iDDR User Guide Appendix B Connector Pin outs The following sections describe iDDR rear panel connector pinouts e RS 422 connector pinouts e Analog audio connector pinouts e GPI I O connector pinouts RS 422 connector pinouts The RS 422 interface conforms to ANSI SMPTE 207M 1997 standard SMPTE 422 Female 0000o O ee JO 9 6 Pin Signal Description 1 GND Frame Ground 2 TXD Differential Transmit Data low 3 RXD Differential Receive Data high 4 GND Transmit Signal Common 5 NC Spare 6 GND Receive Signal Common 7 TXD Differential Transmit Data high 8 RXD Differential Receive Data low 9 GND Signal Ground Analog audio connector pinouts Connector Connector Push Audio In eB Audio Out female A A N y male Turbo iDDR User Guide 285 Appendix B Connector Pin outs Pin Audio In Pin Audio Out l Signal Ground l Signal Ground 2 2 3 3 GPI I O connector pinouts 8 1 eeeee ok ere JO 15 9 Pin Signal Pin Signal l Output 1 9 Input 1 2 Output 2 10 Input 2 3 Output 3 11 Input 3 4 Output 4 12 Input 4 5 Output 5
45. As a reminder Read Only is displayed in the StatusBar when the clip loaded or playing is still being recorded Turbo iDDR User Guide 71 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Guide to using front panel Player display The front panel player display is used to play a clip or playlists modify clip names adjust clip mark in and mark out points create sub clips and stripe timecode Press either the P1 or P2 buttons to show the player display The following describes the player display controls Storage gt a s Channel APRIORA RU OR EE T e indicator Information Monitor ge y Thumbnail A i To Clip 4 Buttons Progress T 00 E 00 Bar lof 1 In Clip 00 00 00 00 Properties uk bcli 00 00 05 000 SU0ciP Status Player 1 Clip_7 cued P Bar Control Description and User Operation Channel Information P1 00 26 00 05 Current Timecode Displays recorded timecode Text color is white during playback and dimmed at other times The value of xx xx xx xx is displayed when the recorded timecode is not present or invalid 00 00 04 25 MMI Countdown Timecode Displays the time remaining in the clip or list Monitor Thumbnail a Thumbnail Used to visually identify the clip Generated using the 16th frame of the clip An empty thumbnail with a black X is used if the clip does not have a thumbnail When playing a list the thumbnail changes each time a new event is
46. E to E mode 146 editing mark points 145 EE or PB indicator 144 jump to a timecode 146 loading clips 146 meter bar button 145 Scrub Bar 155 subclips creating 146 thumbnail 145 time dome display modifying 145 player channel settings 41 Playlist assignable buttons 168 countdown display options 144 147 168 list properties viewing 170 list timecode selecting 168 list view display options 170 list display options 169 time cursor 169 power cords certification 15 previewing a clip 129 product damage precautions 13 program 84 85 163 164 Properties metadata working with 238 protocol monitor 110 246 Protocol Player local and protocol control 265 protocol control only 259 Protocol Recorder local and protocol control 261 protocols 252 R read only 71 143 rear panel view 26 Recorder assignable buttons 128 available storage displaying 129 clip name changing 128 context menu items 129 145 146 148 168 170 172 216 current timecode display 128 fixed length recording 129 locating a clip 129 new clip 129 preview 129 timecode source indicator 128 timedome 129 recorder channel settings 39 recording signals from VHS or U Matic VTRs 295 Recycle Bin bypassing 230 remote control 261 control mode selecting 255 control port selecting 255 controller Id setting 256 current and preview clip 252 playout using current preview 265 protocol monitor 268 Protocol Player local and protocol cont
47. Jog Shuttle knob Setting GPI input triggers To access GPI input settings e On the front panel press MENU wh then choose Tools using the control knob and select GPI Input Triggers Or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration click GPI then click the GPl Input tab On the GPI Input Triggers menu select And make settings as needed Trigger channel s None No GPI inputs are set R1 The GPI input controls channel R1 P1 The GPI input controls channel P1 P2 The GPI input controls channel P2 Turbo iDDR User Guide 43 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR 44 On the GPI Input Triggers menu select And make settings as needed Trigger action Play Play current loaded clip or playlist in assigned Player channel Record Start recording a clip in Recorder channel Stop Stop playback or record of assigned channel Rewind Rewind playback of assigned channel Channel will stay in rewind mode until the beginning of clip is reached or another transport action is taken Fast Forward Fast forward playback of assigned channel Channel will stay in the fast forward mode until the end of clip is reached or another transport action is taken Cue Start Cue to start of clip loaded in Player or Playlist channel Cue End Cue to end of clip loaded in assigned channel Eject Ejects the current clip Preview The cu
48. Player Play clips edit and trim clips 7 create sub clips and playout all Aw sne cip ieaded gt a using cue points C n Out Length T wl rie amp Wintel otn a Cue View 00 00 15 140 e 00 00 00 03 00 00 14 28 Mark In 00 00 15 03 Cue_1 00 00 15 10 Cue_2 00 00 15 14 Mark Out fl gt fe Cs Cn a olny Protocol modes TAFET OAE Player Operate remotely using including Player F cps O industry standard serial control and Recorder protocols over RS 422 or In Out Length p E J 90 00 14 28 90 00 15 14 90 00 00 16 Ethernet Protocol specific Be recorder and player modes are a provided for each supported protocols Playlist List View Player Create and play event 01 00 00 00 00 00 26 15 E Section 1 OCC COA a a i a 01 00 26 16 Clip_ 01 00 31 12 Clip_8 01 00 36 02 Clip_9 01 01 02 18 Clip_11 CI CICO BF Cua fond Event View 00 00 00 00 00 00 26 13 Event In Event Out Length 90 00 00 00 00 00 26 14 00 00 26 14 0 26 13 4 Y e x al z playlists Lists include clips recorded in Recorder mode or imported using the clips pane 120 Turbo iDDR User Guide Tools in AppCenter Tools in AppCenter AppCenter includes the following tools for managing the iDDR and its assets Tools User Interface Essential Tasks Configuration Manager W Configuration for lo
49. SINUS aian asec i eel cece 13 Product Introduction Product overview and key features cccccceccsssececcseeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeesaaeeesseseeeeesenees 20 Funcional COSCHIOTIO Nassari a cou tasoeenstausenteersabews 23 AOU E TOE MOJE noinein a E S EKO EE a 23 E tO Econsid rati nS enegie eaa a aaaea aa aaa AiR Es 24 Media disk space How media is stored ccccccsseeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaanaeess 24 Front panelcontrols ANG INGICALONS eis cen eeces seus sevecevecceerececeecechncobneretuocnadcaedsessbecces 25 Rear panel CONMECIOlS enen a a a aeeesaeceteaee 26 TUDO AD DIR CONTOLMOQES arraien naa a e EEA 27 Power on and shutting dOWN ccccccscceesecceecceeeeeeceeceeuseeeeeessesaaseceseeseaeeseeeessanagss 29 Accessing the Windows operating system ccccccsseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseseeeessaaes 31 To access the Windows desktop cccccccssseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeaeseeseeseeenas 31 Configuration Turbo iDDR Using the configuration manager cssecccccceccseeeeeececseeeeeceessaeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeesaaeaeess 34 Accessing Turbo iDDR configuration cccceccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseeaaas 34 Saving and restoring YOUr Settings arcra aaa a E 34 FESIOning GSIallll SERINGE aiea a a E eo heen 35 About video scaling settings lt cc2c5 lt scascccets cca dccachesees veignadecngeisncencapet neeedeaseiehseieadioa 36 About aspect ratio conversion Modes c
50. See also Video scaling considerations on page 37 NOTE The transition between events with different resolutions takes approximately I second During this time play channel output is switched to black Inserting a clip that is still recording Clips that are currently recording behave as other clips do in a list except for the following restriction e The event out timecode is set to the last recorded frame at the time the clip is inserted in List view or created in Event view You can move the event out timecode as needed while the clip is still recording or after record is stopped Inserting a playlist in a playlist workarounds While iDDR does not support a true nested playlist you can retain some of the functionality of inserting a playlist in a playlist in the following ways These are available in workstation operating mode only 166 Turbo iDDR User Guide Selecting Playlist mode e Save the list as a program then insert it into another playlist as an event e Use multi item select and copy paste e Copy paste events or sections within the same list or from other lists e Copy the list in the clips pane then load and edit the list Selecting Playlist mode Playlist mode requires a single play channel If a play channel is currently being used by another mode you can use the following steps to select the Playlist mode Selecting the Playlist mode causes the current play channel mode to exit when Playlist mod
51. The iDDR does not support nested bins that is a bin cannot contain another bin Current Bin The current bin functions as the target bin when recording clips or as the source bin when loading clips The current bin contents are listed in the Clips Pane The V default bin is created automatically Disk Volume The iDDR has one disk volume located on the internal drives The internal disk volume is formatted using the iDDR media file system created by using the Turbo Storage Utility The internal disk volume uses the drive letter V Playlist A sequence of events that can be loaded and played using the Playlist mode Playlists are created in the Playlist mode by adding clips or programs to a list Media Media is the video audio and timecode source material recorded on the disk drives Each media type is stored in it s own file which are referenced by one or more clips for playback Clip A clip references the media files stored on the media drives to allow playback of the video and associated audio and timecode recorded from a single source Deleting a clip deletes the media referenced by the clip only if it is not referenced by another clip You can use the Find Links feature to find related assets See Finding linked assets on page 236 Program Programs are generated from loop record mode or from a playlist using the Playlist mode Programs generated in Playlist mode include all the media and
52. Thumbnail dialog box E Change Thumbnail Would you like to set this clip s thumbnail ta the current DY position NOTE If clip marks are edited so that the video frame used to generate the thumbnail is outside the new clip marks the thumbnail is reset to a position near the mark in of the modified clip To reset the thumbnail e Select the thumbnail image then choose Reset in the pop up menu This resets the clip thumbnail to the 16th frame in the clip Striping timecode replacing the timecode track The stripe timecode dialog allows you to overwrite the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace the recorded timecode with time of day or a specific start timecode value 1 Load the clip in the a play channel 2 In Control view select Player Stripe Timecode The Stripe Timecode dialog box opens MS Stripe Timecode Replace timecode media with Time of Day Start Time 01 00 00 000 lt Drop frame Cancel 3 Specify the replacement timecode Time of Day The new timecode track will start with the current time of day and will contain continuous values ranging from the current time of day plus the length Turbo iDDR User Guide 157 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 158 of the clip Fixed Time After choosing this option select the timecode entry control and enter a start timecode value The new timecode track will contain continuous values ranging fr
53. a Clip that iS recording cccccceeecccceeeseeecceeeececeeeececeseessenaneeesseees 137 Changing the timM COde SOULCE cccccccceeceeeeseeececeeeeeesauasaeeeseeeeeeeeesseessaaaess 138 Selecting WIGESCrEEN Mode isane a E a a 139 Changing the current DiN xcccsck secccnc ceca cecehd vested iea 139 Renaming a Clp asierea a eee ees relate dear ee uies 140 Viewing clip PrOPEItieS cceseececcssseeccesseeeeceeeeecceuesececseuseeessasseeeessasseessaasseess 140 Locating a ClpDaeno a A E icebadeeorauadeaoes 141 Displaying available storage Space cccccceeeccceececeesseeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeesaaaeees 141 Pl ying and diti g CDS aenrneresseni n e a e a a iar ae daai in 141 ADOUR AV ING CDS es oes asta a a e Wleauneeenbetdce 143 Selecting Player mode in APPCentel ccccceeecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssesaeeeeseees 143 Guide to using Workstation Player Control VieW ccccccccceseeeseseesseeeeeeeeees 144 Guide to using Workstation Player Cue ViCW cccccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 147 Loadingumedia tor playout ccc nce ee te ea i eel 149 BAe hd Leto AC 9 ee teer meee rn Seeman eee ep nee err a Renee ert ose ee eee tee eee eee ee nee 150 Selecting loop DIAY eerta Saccwrce tse eben st cian ducts D oy sere s 150 SELECTING E 1O E MOC Cre ces ies ecde ce cored s ce a a ciclen het chest edie 150 Jumping tO a specific timecode cccccseeeeeseeeecccecceseeeeecseesenseeeeescacse
54. busy indicator Indicates that data is being written or read to disk Headphone jack and volume Used to monitor the audio output signal of the selected channel control Switches automatically when a channel is selected IEEE1394A and USB Connectors for capable devices useful for media import export Connectors Front panel controls Provides VTR like controls for operating the iDDR Refer to Guide to using the front panel on page 50 Drive Bay Houses the removable media drives Turbo iDDR User Guide 25 Chapter 1 Product Introduction Rear panel connectors 0009 2 OOP CO DVI I LTC Out P1 dn nes PLAYER S PDIF VIDEO REFERENCE LTC Out icon Ladi oureur novso paver siror s0i composte s video Lin SPDiF 501 SD RECORDER e Pa CMPStN SVieo ibeonerenewce UGOM LW ourrur worso taven Spor Si Composte svaeo OUTPUT HD SD PLAYER S PDIF SDI RS 422 D RS 422 D RS 422 GHD Ch 1 P1 Ch 2 EN Ch 2 Ch 1 P2 Ch 2 O O O O O O S co GE 26 Turbo iDDR User Guide Turbo iDDR control modes Turbo iDDR control modes You can control the Turbo iDDR locally the front panel controls or through workstation control mode You can also control the iDDR remotely oS oim Q e3 Sh 3 2 sO
55. button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The Clip Properties dialog box appears There are three pages in the clip dialog box General Media and Data The General and Media pages are self explanatory The Data page is used to add metadata to the clip To learn more refer to Working with asset metadata on page 238 Turbo iDDR User Guide Viewing asset properties Viewing the General properties page W Clip_12 Properties F Mame Clip_12 i Type Clip Location VijfideFault Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Format HTSZ Mon DropFrame Compression MpegStdDeF Sizes ME yhes Length 00 00 00 00 Created 05 0205 05 30 PM Modified 0502 05 05 30 PM Aspect Ratio Unknown Locked Cancel Viewing Media Properties page The Media page displays all the relevant clip timecodes including clip marks and the first and last frame of the clip A Time Dome gives a graphical display of the relative position of the marks within the recorded media E Clip _7 Properties Mame Clip_ Type Clip General Location WiyideFault Marks File 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 042E 0000 0g 2E Length HTH TE es MHH TE ee Erase Unused Media Cancel Viewing Data properties page This page allows you to define your own metadata and specify values for that metadata Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 238 Viewi
56. choose Remove Effect 96 Turbo iDDR User Guide Pausing i Pausing at the end of an event at the end of an event Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist then press ME NU oh and choose Add Effect Mark s Kids 00 05 30 00 2of4 In 00 00 00 00 uk 00 00 05 00 3 Rotate the control knob to highlight Show black Freeze on last frame Show E to E or Freeze on next event then push in the knob to select The Pause symbol os is displayed on the event thumbnail Importing and exporting media This section includes the following topics About importing media on page 98 To import a video file on page 98 To import a still image file on page 98 About exporting media on page 100 To export media on page 100 Turbo iDDR User Guide 97 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control About importing media You can import media using standard multimedia media and still image file formats Source files can be located on a local Turbo iDDR disk drive fixed or removable media or a mapped networked drive Supported multimedia file formats Supported File formats Video elementary format Audio elementary format AVI MPEG program streams MPEG 2 Video MPEG Layer II Audio 48 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM Dolby digital AC 3 GXF DV25 48 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM MPEG 2 Video Dolby digital AC 3 WMV Windows Media Windows Media Video Windows Media Audio Q
57. clip select the default clip name Clip Clip_1 then enter a new clip name Select the record button on the front panel g or use the onscreen transport controls J The recording progresses until you select Stop Using Crash record mode Crash record occurs when you start a recording without specifying a clip name The clip is given a default name then the recording continues until you select stop To crash record i Verify video audio widescreen AC3 audio and other settings for your recording as explained in Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 130 2 Select the record button on the front panel g or use the onscreen transport controls B The recording progresses until you select Stop Turbo iDDR User Guide 131 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Using Fixed Length record mode You can specify the clip length before recording or during recording Fixed length recording continues until the clip length is reached or until you select stop 1 Verify video audio widescreen AC3 audio and other settings for your recording as explained in Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 130 2 Select Length in the Recorder pane The Length dialog box appears E Length 01 00 00 0 clear QOOQOO na oo 48 5000 3 Enter the clip length by typing only numbers colons are added automatically 4 Choose OK in the dialog box or press Enter 5
58. clip using one of the following methods e In Recorder select the Preview button or e Inthe Monitor pane drag and drop from the Recorder monitor a Player monitor The play channel becomes the selected channel and the clip is cued and ready for play NOTE If a play channel is not available i e the play channels are already playing a clip a warning message is displayed in the status bar 3 To play the clip select the play button on the front panel P or use the onscreen transport controls p Turbo iDDR User Guide 137 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Changing the timecode source You can select the timecode source you want to record You can use the internal timecode generator or the rear panel LTC input Timecode Timecode Display Source R1 INT Clip gno dip loaded gt o a New Clip Location local v fdeFault Preview In Out Length Propert 17 10 16 24 a CIKEL To change the timecode source 1 Perform one of the following to open the options dialog box e In the AppCenter main menu click Recorder Options Timecode OF e In the Recorder pane click the timecode display insane ieee hye The Options dialog box appears Select a timecode source for recording and display LTC INTiGenerator Time of day Start time 00 00 00 00 Drop frame 2 Click the Timecode button 138 Turbo iDDR User Guide Selecting widescreen mode 3 Choose
59. considered an act of modifying or new manufacturing of a laser product under U S regulations contained in 21CFR Chapter 1 subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1 People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for distribution within the U S A and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH The laser safety regulations are published in the Laser Product Performance Standard Code of Federal Regulation CFR Title 21 Subchapter J The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 825 Radiation of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide governs laser products outside the United States Europe and member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the jurisdiction of the Comit Europ en de Normalization Electrotechnique CENELEC Safety Certification This product has been evaluated and meets the following Safety Turbo iDDR User Guide Certification Standards Safety Certification Standard Designed tested for compliance with ANSI UL60950 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third edition 12 01
60. current bin 123 D data rate guidelines for selecting 38 disk volume 123 216 DVD drive sending files to 100 201 E to E mode in Player 146 editing a clip 145 297 Index electric shock avoiding 13 emission limits certifications 15 Ethernet See network event new event creating 171 exporting log files 249 F fire hazard avoiding 13 FireWire selecting 66 67 135 137 front panel illustration 25 Jog Shuttle knob 52 transport controls 51 transport controls using 51 front panel setup 43 G GPI connector pinout 286 electrical specification 294 GPI triggers input 43 output 45 grounding safety 13 guidelines for video rate selection 38 H host names adding 275 IEEE 1394 selecting 66 67 135 137 illegal characters 223 224 import from device 98 197 from file 98 197 injury precautions 13 K keyboard shortcuts 282 L list 298 Turbo iDDR User Guide properties viewing 170 log files exporting 249 logging database 249 loop play mode selecting 145 M mechanical specifications 289 media disks displaying available storage time 129 metadata 238 searching 236 Meter Bar button 145 minimizing AppCenter 31 monitoring transfers 110 246 network cabling connecting 272 host names adding 275 O Odetics Protocol 252 onscreen transport controls 124 p Player assignable buttons 144 clip properties viewing 146 clip timecode display 144 clip renaming 144
61. enabled the output video and audio switches to the record channel input when the play channel is stopped or when no clip is loaded If E to E is disabled the output freezes on the last frame of video See Selecting E to E mode on page 150 146 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using Workstation Player Cue View Guide to using Workstation Player Cue View The Player mode Cue view is used to add cue points to the a clip The Cue View allows you to set modify and jump to cue points on the loaded clip Clicking the Cue tab displays the Cue view The following describes the basic controls in the Cue view Customizable Current Cue List countdown View Buttons Frame Timecode Tabs Default buttons Timecode are shown 00 00 14 28 pe 00 00 00 15 Ci 00 00 14 285 Mark In o Add Cue gt 00 00 15 03 Tus Il o TOTIES G gt 00 00 15 210 Cue Z co 00 15 14 Mark Gut 0 Goto 7 CI CIMON Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Right click a button to open a pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Add Cue same as selecting Add Cue from the Player menu Remove removes the selected cue Goto used to jump to the selected cue the next cue or to a specific timecode See Jumping to a specific timecode on page 151 Rename opens text entry dialog box to ren
62. fixed length you specify is reached iDDR begins to erase the oldest media in 3 minute segments to make room for new media In this way new media is continuously recorded while the recording is kept to a fixed length The loop recording is stored in the 1DDR as a program The program thumbnail is displayed in the clips pane immediately after the recording starts While recording you can load the loop record program in Player mode for playout or to create subclips The media referenced by the subclips that you create is saved outside the loop record program and does not subtract from the loop record length The subclips can be inserted in Playlist mode as play events Turbo iDDR User Guide 125 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 126 Loop mode operational considerations Consider the following when planning for Loop Record operation Minimum loop record length 6 minutes Maximum loop record length Maximum record length is limited by the amount of storage space and the compression settings used A message is displayed if the fixed length you enter exceeds the available disk space Minimum record to playback time 5 seconds In other words playback in loop record can start no sooner than 5 seconds after the start of record Modifying the loop record name or length You can modify the loop record name or length during record If you reduce record length the oldest media outside the new record length is erased Stoppin
63. following steps to select the Player mode Selecting Player mode causes the play channel operation to stop then Player mode 1s started To start Player mode on a play channel 1 If the channel pane is not already in split screen view select View Split Screen 2 In the monitor pane select the control mode drop down list for the play channel then choose Player The channel switches to Player mode and becomes the selected channel Turbo iDDR User Guide 143 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Guide to using Workstation Player Control View The Control view allows you to play a clip modify its name adjust mark in and mark out points create sub clips and stripe timecode Selecting the Control view tab shows the Control view The following describes the essential controls in the Control view Assignable Clip Buttons Timecode Default buttons are shown 03 FE Clip Name amp Countdown View Current Bin Timecode Tabs Click clip name to rename 00 01 22 p Clip Clip 7 8 Location jv fdeFault q In Gut Length a 00 00 00 00 OO 00 04 26 GO 00 04 26 OO 00 01 22 Thumbnail Time Dome Mark in amp Meter Bar Click to change Click to select Mark Out Button thumbnail loop play mode Click to set to Click to adjust current frame audio level timecode Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify t
64. from the properties data page 1 Select the asset in the Clips Pane asset list 2 Open the Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The properties dialog box appears 240 Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with asset metadata Clip_1 Properties x j Mame Clip_1 Add Data Type Clip B Location Vi fdefault General Clear Media Creator Operator_1 Date 05 28 03 Modify Cancel 3 Click the Data tab then scroll to locate and select the metadata entry you want to clear 4 Click Clear The metadata value is now blank 5 Repeat step 3 and step 4 to clear other metadata values 6 Click OK If the metadata name is used by any other asset that is a value has been entered on another properties page the metadata name will remain on all properties pages See also Deleting asset metadata on page 241 Deleting asset metadata You may need to delete a metadata name that is remove it from all properties pages when it becomes obsolete or to repair a typographical error There is no delete metadata feature however metadata names are checked every time you close a properties dialog box If a metadata name is not being used that
65. in Playlist mode as there is always a list loaded To create a new list 1 Select Playlist New List The New List dialog box is displayed 2 Select the bin where you want to store the list edit the default name for the new list then click OK The current list closes and the new list is created containing one section and no events Inserting media in a playlist A new list contains one section and no events When you start inserting play events they will be played in the order you insert them You can move events in the list up or down or insert new events between existing ones by selecting the insertion point Selecting the insertion point in a playlist e When using the Insert button or menu item the insertion point is after the currently 174 Turbo iDDR User Guide Inserting media in a playlist selected event e When using the drag and drop method you will see a drop cursor as you drag the event over the list The drop cursor indicates where the new event will be inserted NOTE The time cursor only indicates the current play position and cannot be selected and moved Selecting and dragging may inadvertently select and move the event Inserting events in List view To insert a play event in List view 1 Select the List tab 2 Do one of the following e Drag and drop assets from the clips pane using the drop cursor to locate the insertion point e Drag and drop from the monitor pane Select the thumbnail
66. is no values are entered for the metadata name on any asset properties page the metadata name is automatically deleted and removed from all metadata pages To delete a metadata name you just created 1 In the asset Properties dialog box click Data 2 Select the metadata name you want to delete 3 Click Clear 4 Click OK The metadata name is removed from all asset properties pages since no metadata value exists for any asset Turbo iDDR User Guide 241 Chapter 4 242 Operation AppCenter Workstation To delete a metadata name already in use To completely purge a metadata name you must clear the metadata value on all asset properties data pages When the last asset is cleared and the properties dialog is closed the metadata name is purged and removed from all properties pages Refer to Clearing metadata on page 240 Viewing asset properties The properties dialog box varies depending on the asset Viewing clip properties on page 242 Viewing playlist properties on page 243 Viewing program properties on page 244 Viewing bin properties on page 244 Viewing volume properties on page 245 Viewing clip properties 1 Select the clip in the Clips Pane asset list 2 Open the Clip Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties
67. is available when you operate the Turbo iDDR using a VGA monitor mouse and keyboard To access online help in AppCenter e In the main user interface toolbar click Help then choose Help Topics Thomson Grass Valley Web Site This public Web site contains all the latest manuals and documentation and additional support information Use the following URL http www thomsongrassvalley com 10 Turbo iDDR User Guide Grass Valley Product Support Grass Valley Product Support To get technical assistance check on the status of problems or report new problems contact Grass Valley Product Support via e mail the Web or by phone or fax Web Technical Support To access support information on the Web visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site You can download software or find solutions to problems by searching our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ database World Wide Web _http www thomsongrassvalley com support Technical Support E mail Address gvgtechsupport thomson net Phone Support Use the following information to contact product support by phone during business hours Afterhours phone support is available for warranty and contract customers United States Latin America Eastern Europe Southern Europe Middle East Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Denmark Dubai Finland Authorized Support Representative 800 547 8949 Toll Free 800 547 8949 Toll Free 49 6155 87
68. jpg bmp tiff tga gif png Remote control support You can use remote control devices and applications software developed for the Turbo iDDR that use industry standard serial protocols For each supported protocol the iDDR provides a protocol specific application Supported protocols includes BVW over RS422 and AMP protocol over RS422 or Ethernet GPI triggers GPI input triggers can be assigned to channels to control actions such as record play stop and skip a playlist event GPI output triggers can be assigned to play channels and inserted in playlists to control external equipment as the list is played Turbo iDDR User Guide Functional description Functional description The diagram illustrates how the three iDDR channels operate independently but share acommon internal disk storage area This gives all channels one record channel and two play channels simultaneous random access to the same media files This means that you can play a clip that is still recording on the record channel Each channel handles one video track two audio tracks and one timecode track EE Switch Path to P1 R1 P1 Input Output Circuit Circuit R1 P1 Record Play Channel 1 Channel 1 P2 Play Channel 2 P2 Output EE Switch Path to P2 a About E to E mode Note that an E to E path is provided for monitoring purposes In E to E mode the record channel audio and video inputs are switched to the play channel aud
69. list is saved as a program in the current bin 196 Turbo iDDR User Guide Importing and exporting media Importing and exporting media This section includes the following topics e About importing media on page 197 e To import a video file on page 197 e To import a still image file on page 198 e About exporting media on page 201 e To export media on page 202 About importing media You can import media using standard multimedia media and still image file formats Source files can be located on a local Turbo iDDR disk drive fixed or removable media or a mapped networked drive Supported multimedia file formats Supported File formats Video elementary format Audio elementary format AVI MPEG program streams MPEG 2 Video MPEG Layer II Audio 48 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM Dolby digital AC 3 GXF DV25 48 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM MPEG 2 Video Dolby digital AC 3 WMV Windows Media Windows Media Video Windows Media Audio QuickTime Supported still image and image sequence file formats You can import still images and image sequence files from local Windows drives or networked devices Imports are recorded using the aspect ratio and resolution you specify Still images are imported as a clip with a duration that you specify Supported file types include jpg bmp tiff tga gif png NOTE Before playing a clip that is being imported from a file or stream use the Transfe
70. may try limiting transfers to one at a time e Adding Removing USB devices The USB connectors on the rear panel and front panel can be used to connect a mouse keyboard USB drive or other USB device Do not plug or unplug these devices while the iDDR is being used for critical play to air activity Turbo iDDR User Guide 201 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 202 e Maximum file sizes when exporting assets to USB drives Exporting assets with long durations may result in file sizes that exceed 4GB Some USB drives are formatted using FAT FAT32 which has the 4GB maximum file size limitation Attempting to send a file to these disk volumes will cause the transfer operation to fail Disk volumes formatted using NTFS allow larger maximum file sizes Before exporting an asset be sure to check that the file size is less than 4GB otherwise ensure that the file system on the target drive supports larger files sizes To export media 1 Select the asset s in the Clips Pane that you want to send to a file 2 Open the Send to dialog box using one of the following steps e Select Clips Send to or e Right click the clip in the Clips Pane and select Send to The Send dialog box appears Send V default Clip_ 1 Destination Save in E Sampleclips Bin NTSC SD420B0 mpg E NTSC SD42010 mpg Stream File Name MyClip Cancel File Type MPEG File mpg MPEG File mpq
71. or video image then drag to List view Use the drop cursor to locate the insertion point e Double click an asset in the clips pane The asset is inserted in the list after the insertion point e Select an event in the list as the insert point then select one or more assets in the clips pane Click Insert in the clips pane to insert the event after the insert point e Select an event in the list as the insert point then click Insert in List view and select one or more assets in the Insert Event dialog box Click OK to insert the events Insert Event Look in V NewscClips Event Name Clip_1 Cancel Inserting play events in Event view To insert a play event in Event view 1 Click the Event tab 2 Do one of the following e Drag and drop an asset from the clips pane then click the Event view Insert button to add it to the list Turbo iDDR User Guide 175 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation e Select an asset in the clips pane and click the New Event button After trimming the event as required click the Event view Insert button to insert the event in the list e Click the New button to open the New Event dialog box Select an asset in the New Event dialog box then click Load Trim the clip if necessary then click Insert The event is displayed in the Event view and added to the list Insert Event Look in V NewscClips iz H x 7 Clip 5 Event Name Clip_1 Cancel Using copy
72. output timing By default all video output timing is set to match the video reference input signal zero timed You can use the Video Output Timing adjustment provided for each play channel to meet downstream timing requirements 1 To adjust video output timing e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration then select the Channel tab and click the P1 or P2 channel to configure e In front panel mode press a play channel button or P then press Menu oh select Tools using the control knob and choose P1 or P2 Setup 2 Use the control knob to adjust video output timing as required Make adjustments as needed Frame Offset Delays video output Range NTSC 0 1 frames PAL 0 3 frames Lines Delays the video output Range NTSC 525 lines 0 524 coarse lines PAL 625 lines 0 624 lines Samples Delays the video output Range NTSC 525 lines 0 1715 fine clock samples PAL 625 lines 0 1727 clock samples Analog Delays the timing within one sample interval This setting Sub Pixel applies to analog video only and is available only if the video SC output type is NTSC or PAL Turbo iDDR User Guide 47 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR 48 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Topics here include Guide to using the front panel on page 50 Recording clips on page 57 Playing and editing clips on page 70 Playing playlist
73. pane and warning message is written in the Status log Analog Audio Parameter Specification Audio Standard Balanced differential analog Audio Inputs 2 per record channel Female XLR Audio Outputs 2 per play channel Male XLR Impedance Input 15k ohms balanced Output 50 ohms per side balanced Sampling and encoding 48 KHz and 16 bit pcm Audio headphone output with front panel option Parameter Specification Audio Standard Single ended analog output with volume control Channels One stereo pair switched to monitor selected video channel Connector 1 4 inch Stereo Audio Jack LTC Input Output Parameter Specification Standard SMPTE 12M Longitudinal Time Code AC coupled differential input Number of Inputs 1 channel per record Female XLR Number of Outputs 1 channel per play Male XLR Input Impedance 1K ohm Output Impedance 50 ohm Minimum Input Voltage 0 1 V peak to peak differential Maximum Input Voltage 2 5 V peak to peak differential Nominal Output Voltage 2 0 V peak to peak differential LTC Reader LTC reader will accept LTC at rates between 1 30 and 80 times the nominal rate in either forward or reverse directions Turbo iDDR User Guide 293 Appendix C Specifications Parameter Specification LTC Transmitter LTC transmitter outputs LTC at the nominal frame rate for the selected standard at
74. played Progress bar The progress bar represents the length of the playback Audio presence indicator Indicate the presence of recorded audio 72 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using front panel Player display Control Description and User Operation Clip Properties Clip 7 00 00 05 00 lofi In 00 00 00 00 uk 0 00 05 00 Clip Name Displays the clip s name When no clip is loaded this control shows lt no clip gt Clip Length Shows the clip s length in hours minutes seconds and frames If no clip is loaded the length is blank If the clip is being recorded this value will change about every second Event Number When a list is loaded into the player the event number indicates which event is currently playing in the list for example 3 of 20 When a single clip is loaded the event number is always 1 of 1 If no clip is loaded the event number is blank In and Out Shows the timecode values for the first and last frame of the clip You can modify clip in and out points See Moving clip mark in mark out points on page 77 After modifying In Out points a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed to indicate that marks can be cleared to reveal more media or unused media can be erased to free disk space See Erasing a clip s unused media on page 107 Toolbar Buttons 4 Loop OFF Toggles the loop play mode on and off E to E OFF
75. pop up menu Play the next section Press the Play button and hold the FF button down OYr Press the Menu button then choose Goto and then Next Section in the Goto pop up menu Skip playback to any event or section in the list First press and hold the Play button then select the event or section using the touch screen Select an event or section to playback First select the event or section then press the Menu button and choose Selection in the Goto pop up menu Then press Play Turbo iDDR User Guide 91 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control To Do this Avoid delays when jumping to a new event or First select the new event or section then wait until section the diamond or standby icon is filled in before jumping to the new event or section Use keyboard shortcuts to play the playlist See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 Use GPI input triggers to play the playlist See Setting GPI input triggers on page 43 Playing a playlist in loop mode Choosing the loop mode allows a playlist to play out continuously until stop is selected To enable loop mode e Press MENU f then use the control knob to choose Loop and then press Play P Managing playlists To Do this Save a copy of a playlist 1 Press Menu Se then select Save List using the control knob 2 Name the list using the onscreen keypad and control knob or use an external keyboard 3 S
76. previously recorded clips is supported through AMP Serial Control Protocol Contact Thomson Grass Valley for more information on control devices available Pre roll time Recording begins as soon as record is selected About loop record mode Loop record allows you to specify a fixed length recording that records continuously When the fixed length you specify is reached 1DDR begins to erase the oldest media in 3 minute segments to make room for new media In this way new media is continuously recorded while the recording is kept to a fixed length The loop recording is stored in the iDDR as a program The program thumbnail is displayed in the clips pane immediately after the recording starts While recording you can load the loop record program in Player mode for playout or to create subclips The media referenced by the subclips that you create is saved outside the loop record program and does not subtract from the loop record length The subclips can be inserted in Playlist mode as play events Loop mode operational considerations Consider the following when planning for Loop Record operation e Minimum loop record length 6 minutes e Maximum loop record length Maximum record length is limited by the amount 58 Turbo iDDR User Guide About loop record mode of storage space and the compression settings used A message is displayed if the fixed length you enter exceeds the available disk space e Minimum record to playback
77. red text Source The source of the transfer job If the source includes multiple files the first file name is displayed plus a sign beside it You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page Destination The destination of the transfer job You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page Status For ongoing transfer jobs the transfer rate is displayed in megabytes per second and percentage of job completed All jobs waiting in the queue are shown as Pending Jobs that encountered errors are displayed in red text along with an error code Properties Button Used to view more detailed information about a transfer job See Viewing detailed transfer job properties on page 210 Remove Button Used to remove jobs from the Transfer queue Remove All Button Used to remove all of the jobs from the Transfer queue at once Abort Button Used to cancel transfer jobs in progress Turbo iDDR User Guide Transfer Monitor pages and buttons Receiving Page The Receiving page displays all import transfer jobs E Transfer Monitor Proper qi WDR D E NE y default Clip_1 D 0 9ME s 5 Remove Sending e pet iVORI Completed Em Y default clip_2 O OMB s 12 Sending Page The Sending page displays all Send to transfer jobs and their status E Transfer Monitor iil Wee By cii Proper a 8 ae Vi fdefaultfClip_ Recei
78. s aspect ration attribute you must re record the clip Adjust audio level if needed You can use the audio leveling feature to adjust the analog or digital audio input levels excluding dolby encoded digital audio 1 In the Recorder pane select the Meterbar 4 button Gang Unity p o M 4 b Dl 4 2 Adjust audio level using the graphical faders Select the Meterbar button 4 Recorder view again to return to Turbo iDDR User Guide To record a clip Record Channel Setting Procedure Verify video compression settings See Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR on Choosing a video compression setting isa page 33 trade off between image quality and storage capacity Higher video quality produces larger files which take up more storage space and take longer to transfer to external devices To record a clip This section covers Using New Clip record mode on page 131 Using Crash record mode on page 131 Using Fixed Length record mode on page 132 Specify clip length after recording has begun on page 132 Using loop record on page 132 Using New Clip record mode To create and name a clip before recording starts l Verify video audio widescreen AC3 audio and other settings for your recording as explained in Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 130 Select New Clip to create and load a clip To rename the
79. shows the relative position of mark in mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play time remaining The Time Dome is also used to enable and indicate loop play mode You must temporarily switch to Local Control mode then select and hold the Time Dome and select Loop Play in the pop up menu Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Guide to AMP Recorder Local Protocol mode The Local and Protocol control mode allows you to control the record channel locally as well as remotely You can select this mode by choosing Local and Protocol control in the Options dialog box See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 The following describes the controls and indicators used in the Local and Protocol control mode Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Default buttons Use Context menu to modify 4 a a 00 00 01 26 lip clip_3 Location Ws fdeFault Options 9 00 00 02 06 00 00 04 053 OO 00 01 26 coc are shown In Out Length AU OO 01 2F J Cm gt ey ees oa pps 2 Thumbnail Time Dome Length Meter Bar Current and Button Button Preview clips Click to specify Click to adjust clip length audio Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignment to best suit your wo
80. size they are more signal indicators than exact level indicators If the audio source is compressed data AC3 then the audio meters are replaced with the Dolby symbol Progress bar In crash or loop records the progress bar is used to show progress without any specific units A pink to red gradient used to animate progress Since l a fixed length record has a definite end the progress bar represents the duration of the record The bar color in a fixed length record is red 60 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using the front panel Recorder display Control Description and User Operation Tool Buttons Loop Record Loop Record On Loop Record OFF Toggles the loop record mode on and off When turning on the loop record mode the buffer length timecode entry control appears allowing you to enter a loop length Fixed Length Fixed Length On Fixed Length OFF Toggles the fixed length record mode on and off When turning on the fixed length mode it opens a fixed length timecode entry control Eject gt Eject Ejects the current clip New Clip New Clip Ejects the current clip if any and creates a new clip using the current seed name IEEE 1394A IEEE 1394 On IEEE 1394 COFF Toggles the 1394 record mode on and off
81. subclips by selecting In Out In Out etc To enable Auto Subclip mode e Press MENU is then select Prompts Locating the clip loaded in player You can determine where the currently loaded clip is stored in the media file system using the locate command To locate the currently loaded clip e To locate the loaded clip press MENU oh then select Locate The Clips display opens and lists the contents of the bin where the clip is located Viewing clip properties To view the properties of a clip loaded in Player e Press MENU el then select Properties The Clips display opens and lists the contents of the bin where the clip is located NOTE To learn more about the Clip Properties dialog box Viewing clip properties on page 69 82 Turbo iDDR User Guide Playing playlists Playing playlists Topics in this section include Introducing Playlist mode on page 84 Before using Playlist mode on page 85 Guide to using the Edit List display on page 88 Creating a simple playlist on page 90 Loading a playlist on page 91 Playing a playlist on page 91 Playing a playlist in loop mode on page 92 Managing playlists on page 92 Editing a playlist on page 94 Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 96 Pausing at the end of an event on page 97 Turbo iDDR User Guide 83 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Introducing Playlist mode In add
82. the front panel 1394 port are shared If a device is already connected to port 2 you cannot connect a device to the front panel port or vice versa To use IEEE 1394 Record mode 1 Connect and power on the IEEE 1394 device 2 Press on the iDDR front panel to view recorder display 3 Press IEEE 1394 The record channel input switches to the 1394 input The status bar shows Connecting to device then Connected Initially both the monitor pane and the thumbnail in the Recorder display shows a IEEE 1394 symbol Timecode from the device is also displayed in the Recorder pane If xx xx xx xx 1s displayed the timecode from the device is not valid Use the following step to cue the IEEE 1394 device 4 You can control the IEEE 1394 device remotely play rewind fast forward and stop in one of the following ways e Use the iDDR front panel controls transport control buttons Shuttle Jog Knob e Use the record channel on screen transport controls in AppCenter e Use iDDR keyboard shortcuts see Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 e Press Menu is then choose Seek Enter enter a specific timecode for the IEEE 1394 device to seek Turbo iDDR User Guide Previewing a clip that is recording 5 After positioning the cue point on the IEEE 1394 device use one of the following methods to start recording To Press Then do this Name a clip then start recording Specify the clip length befo
83. to local windows drives or networked devices See To export media on page 115 or Sending media to another Turbo 1DDR on page 205 Import Opens the Import dialog box which is used to import assets from the following sources Media streams from another iDDR Other media file formats from a local drive or over the network Still image source files See About importing media on page 109 Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 242 Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to change the way assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 About the asset context menu To open the asset context menu right click the asset Options Send To ut Copy Paste Rename Delete Links Properties Menu Item Description Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to change the way assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 Send To Opens the Send To dialog box which is used to send assets to a different location another bin disk volume or another iDDR Send To is also used to export clips or programs to local windows drives or networked devices See About importing media on page 109 or See Sending media to another Turbo iDDR on page 119 218 Turbo iDDR U
84. transfers over the 1Gb Ethernet port The source or destination for a streaming transfer must be another Turbo iDDR or M Series 1DDR Requires M Series software version 2 0 10 or higher The format for Turbo iDDR streaming is SMPTE 360M gxf You must configure your network for streaming transfers prior to using these features See Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection on page 271 A transfer job is created for each import or send to operation Once created transfer jobs are added to the transfer job queue where they are dispatched in a first in first out basis Transfer jobs are handled in the order they appear in the queue Any additional jobs wait in the queue You can use the Transfer Monitor to check the status of your transfers See Monitoring media file transfers on page 207 Transferring media from another iDDR 1 In the Clips Pane change to the current bin if desired The current bin will be the destination bin for the import operation For more details see Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 221 2 Select Clips Import The Import dialog box opens 204 Turbo iDDR User Guide Sending media to another Turbo iDDR Source Look in iVDR 2 V inewsclips i Clip_1 05 27 03 04 39 PM Clip_2 05 27 03 04 39 PM Clip_3 05 27 03 04 44 PM Clip_4 05 27 03 04 45 PM Clip_5 05 27 03 04 51 PM File Name Clip_1 Destination Bin Name Vinewsclips Se O Cancel 3
85. transitions in the playlist but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause at the end of an event 216 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using the Clips Pane About the Current Bin drop down list e To access the Current Bin drop down list click the Current Bin label Lookin default E default Organize Bins default Recycle Bin rmy bin Search v clip Search Vi Created Last 3 Days Current bin menu items Menu Item Description and User Operation Organize Bins Opens the Organize Bins dialog box used to manage bins create delete rename change current bin See Working with bins on page 221 Bin List List of all the bins in the current disk volume A volume must always have at least one bin The default bin is created automatically Recycle Bin Displays the contents of the Recycle Bin All assets deleted from the asset list are stored in the Recycle Bin until it is emptied See Working with the Recycle Bin on page 229 Cached Search The last four search results are cached You can view the most recent search results Results using the Current Bin drop down list See Locating assets on page 230 About the Clips menu Click Clips in the AppCenter Workstation main menu to display the Clips Pane context menu The following table describes the context menu items Menu Item Description New Bin Creates a new bin in the current di
86. view You cannot use the Event view while playlist is playing You must stop play back then open Event view to edit an event Creating an event before inserting it in a playlist You can create a playlist event as a new entity rather than using an existing clip for the playlist event To create a new event for insertion into a playlist 1 In Event view do one of the following to define the new event s in and out points e Click Event In Event in to set mark in point and Event Out Event out to set mark out point e Select the Event In or Event Out timecode contro 00 01 11 09 to open the timecode entry dialog box Enter a timecode value then click OK or press Enter e Click the Length timecode entry control and enter a new event length 2 Click Accept to add the event to the list Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing and rearranging events in a playlist Editing event marks Every event has a event in point and an event out point which refer to the first and last frames displayed when the event plays When first created event marks are set to the mark in and mark out of the source clip You can edit the event marks in order to reference only the desired media Event marks can be cleared to reset them to the marks specified in the source clip See Clearing event marks on page 181 The following restrictions apply when editing event marks e Event in must precede the Event out e Event marks cannot be set outside the
87. which channels are receiving messages NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller is connected and at least one command set is sent To open the Protocol Monitor dialog box e Click the Protocol Monitor button in the AppCenter StatusBar The dialog box displays the channel number and protocol being used along with the port number and control mode Local or Protocol only The green status LED indicates the port is receiving protocol commands Turbo iDDR User Guide Using GPI input and output triggers Frotocol Monitor x R2 AMP Port P2 local P AMP Port P1 local Using GPI input and output triggers The 1DDR provides 6 GPI inputs and 6 GPI outputs on a single DB 15 pin rear panel connector GPI input triggers can be used to control channels including but not limited to record play stop and skip a playlist event GPI output triggers can be defined for channels and inserted in playlists to control external equipment as the list is played Topics here include e Making GPI connections on page 269 e Configuring GPI input triggers on page 269 e Configuring GPI output triggers on page 270 Making GPI connections Cable the 1DDR for GPI input and or GPI output You must supply your own interface cable Refer to GPI I O connector pinouts on page 286 lt a DD GPI in out Configuring GPI input triggers Use the con
88. with the Recycle Bin Topics in this section e Viewing the Recycle Bin contents on page 229 e Emptying the Recycle Bin on page 230 e Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 230 Viewing the Recycle Bin contents e Inthe Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select Recycle Turbo iDDR User Guide 229 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 230 The Recycle Bin assets are displayed in the asset list as the current bin You can work with assets in the Recycle Bin just like any other bin Emptying the Recycle Bin 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select Recycle Bin from the bin list 3 Click Empty then Yes to confirm 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box choose Recycle Bin E Organize Bins we Recycle Bin Y Hew Bin Type Bin Recycle Bin Ealore P 1 Items 2 Empty Remove items immediately pty when deleted Bypass Recycle Bin i 3 Select Remove items immediately when deleted NOTE Holding down the SHIFT key during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog box Locating assets Three tools are provided for locating assets Sorting Search and Links You can set how assets are sorted b
89. 0 control options local 27 control options remote 28 keyboard shortcuts 282 minimizing 31 reposition on the desktop 119 tools standard 121 user interface conventions 122 user interface overview 118 application drop down list 124 aspect ratio conversion modes 36 assignable buttons 123 audio analog audio specification 293 digital audio specification 293 audio level adjusting clip play level 145 adjusting clip record level 129 auto subclip mode 146 available storage 129 battery replacement 14 bin current bin 123 description 123 naming illegal characters 223 BVW 252 253 C CD RW drive sending files to 100 201 certifications and compliances 15 channel application 123 channel application selecting 124 Turbo tDDR User Guide clip audio level adjusting in Player 145 editing In Out points 145 metadata 238 naming illegal characters 224 previewing 129 thumbnail changing 145 Clips pane assets importing from file 98 197 metadata 238 send to a device 205 Recycle Bin bypassing 230 compatibility video output connector 38 composite video specification 291 configuration front panel 43 GPI input triggers 43 GPI output triggers 45 loading defaults 35 opening 34 player channel settings 41 recorder channel settings 39 saving and restoring 34 system settings 39 video scaling 36 Configuration Manager 34 connector pin outs analog audio 285 GPI 286 RS 422 285 controller Id 256 conversion modes aspect ratio 36
90. 0 00 07 26 are shown opr lip Clip_3 a New Clip Location w default Preview O In Mut Length Propert Oo 00 02 06 90 00 04 035 oo 00 01 2 00 00 01 26 soc TEAL Time Dome Length Meter Bar Click to enter Button fixed length Click to adjust audio Control Description and User Operation Q Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Right click a button to open a pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Properties Same as selecting Properties on the Recorder menu New Clip Same as selecting New Clip on the Recorder menu Preview Same as selecting Preview on the Recorder menu Locate Same as selecting Locate on the Recorder menu 2 Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source selected for the 16 27 14 3 20 LTC channel Text color is white during record and dimmed at other times The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when the timecode source is not present or is invalid See Changing the timecode source on page 138 Timecode Source The text displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the 16 27 13 29 Lt1c timecode source LTC or INT internal generator See Changing the z z Fd timecode source on page 138 Clip Name Edit Control Displays the clip s name and location in the media storage system To Clip Clip_i rename the cli
91. 0 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 33 1 34 20 77 77 61 1300 721 495 32 2 3349031 55 11 5509 3440 800 547 8949 Toll Free 86 106615 9450 45 45968800 971 4 299 64 40 35 9 68284600 France Germany Greece Hong Kong Italy Netherlands Poland Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland UK 33 1 34 20 77 77 49 6155 870 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 852 2531 3058 39 06 8720351 31 35 6238421 49 6155 870 606 49 6155 870 606 656379 1390 34 91 512 03 50 46 87680705 41 1 487 80 02 44 870 903 2022 A local authorized support representative may be available in your country To locate the support representative for your country visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site Turbo iDDR User Guide Finding Information 12 Turbo iDDR User Guide Safety Summaries General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To av
92. 00 00 000 INT S 24 0 i ay 0 0 Unity l l 20 0 i 40 i gt gt Kia gt i 4 Gang Recorder Context Menu Mew Clip Preview Locate Properties Options w Widescreen 16 9 IEEE 1394 New Clip Used to create and name clip prior to starting the recording If a clip is already loaded selecting New Clip ejects the current clip and creates a new one See Using New Clip record mode on page 131 Preview Used to load the current clip in a play channel for playback while the clip is still recording After record is started select Preview to load the clip into the next available play channel then select Play See Previewing a clip that is recording on page 137 Locate Locates the currently loaded clip in the clips pane See Locating a clip on page 141 Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip See Viewing clip properties on page 140 Options Opens the Record channel options dialog box Widescreen Sets the channel for recording widescreen format Compressed Audio AC3 Sets the channel for recording AC3 audio IEEE 1394 Sets the channel for recording from a IEEE 1394 device Turbo iDDR User Guide 129 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 130 Before you record Recorder settings checklist Before recording check the following recorder channel settings Record Channel Setting Procedure
93. 1 38 Turbo iDDR User Guide Configuring your Turbo iDDR Configuring your Turbo iDDR You can configure your system using either the front panel or the Workstation AppCenter Modifying system settings To access system settings e On the front panel press MENU wh then choose Tools using the control knob and select All Channels or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration then click System Selecta menu item And make settings as needed Video Reference NTSC 59 94 Hz Choose for the NTSC standard sangare PAL 50 Hz Choose for the PAL standard Reference Present Green LED indicates source is present Black LED indicates source is not present Reference Locked Green LED indicates system is locked Black LED indicates system is not locked Time of day source The time of day source is used for event scheduling such as automatic play and record events System Clock The local Windows operating system clock If you select this source you should verify that the clock s time is correct LTC Input The channel s LTC input Audio reference 0 dBU Select the audio reference level used at level 4 dBU your facility 4 dBU Modifying recorder channel R1 settings To access recorder channel settings e On the front panel press MENU oh then choose Tools using the control knob and select R1 Setup or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Confi
94. 13 Input 5 6 Output 6 14 Input 6 7 Output 7 15 Input 7 8 Ground NOTE Turbo iDDR software supports outputs 1 6 and inputs 1 6 only Output 7 pin 7 and input 7 pin 15 are not used 286 Turbo iDDR User Guide Appendix C Specifications Specifications in this chapter e AC power specification e Environmental specifications e Mechanical specifications e Electrical specifications e Operational specifications Turbo iDDR User Guide 287 Appendix C Specifications AC power specification The Turbo iDDR AC power specification is shown in the following table Characteristic Specification Mains Input Voltage 100V to 240V auto range 50 60Hz Power consumption 180 typical maximum AC current 8A 115 VAC 4A 230 VAC Thermal Output 13000 BTU h max AN WARNING Always use a grounded outlet to supply power to the system Always use a power cable with a grounded plug such as the one supplied with the system Environmental specifications Characteristic Specification Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Non Operating Ambient Temperature 10 to 40 C Operating Relative Humidity Operating 20 to 80 from 5 to 45 C Non Operating 10 to 80 from 30 to 60 C Do not operate with visible moisture on the circuit boards Operating Altitude To 10 000 feet IEC 950 compliant to 2000 meters Storage Altitude To 40 000 feet N
95. 279 e Erasing unused media on page 279 Clearing the media file system on page 279 Defragmenting the media drives After extended use of the Turbo iDDR especially when recording and deleting multiple short clips the iDDR media drives can become fragmented Severely fragmented drives can slow down media access operations To prevent this from occurring the iDDR generates a status message well before fragmentation becomes a problem When you receive this status message you should plan a time when the Turbo 1DDR is not in operation and defragment the media drives There are two ways to defragment the media drives e Use the Storage Utility to defragment the drives You can use the Storage Utility defragment the media drives Defragmenting the media drives can take a significant period of time Make sure you allow a day or more to defragment your media drives Refer to the Turbo iDDR Troubleshooting and Service Guide for instructions on using the Defragment command e Clear the file system Alternatively if there is no need to keep the media currently on the Turbo iDDR you can clear the media file system which also defragments the media drives in just a few moments Refer to Clearing the media file system on page 279 278 Turbo iDDR User Guide Erasing unused media Erasing unused media After editing a clip by moving the mark in mark out points the remaining portion of media outside the marks can be erased
96. 3 To change loop record length click Length The Length dialog box appears 4 Enter the clip length by typing only numbers colons are added automatically 5 Click OK in the dialog box or press Enter 6 Select the record button on the front panel g or use the onscreen transport controls B Recording continues until Stop is selected While recording the mark in and mark out update with the current status of the clip The Time Dome gives a visual indication record progress 7 Load and play the clip in Player mode using one of the following steps e In Recorder click the Preview button or e Drag and drop from the Recorder monitor pane to the Player monitor pane Turbo iDDR User Guide 133 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation The play channel becomes the selected channel and the clip is cued and ready for play 134 Turbo iDDR User Guide Using IEEE 1394 Record mode Using IEEE 1394 Record mode The IEEE 1394 FireWire ports can be used for importing and recording media from a digital recording device that uses DV or MPEG2 format After selecting the IEEE 1394 input for the Record channel you can use the iDDR transport controls to control the IEEE 1394 device remotely through the 1394 connection NOTE The rear panel port 2 top and the front panel 1394 port are shared If a device is already connected to port 2 you cannot connect a device to the front panel port or vice versa To use IEEE 1394 Rec
97. 4 Configuring IDDR network settings Configure Windows network settings This procedure guides you to the relevant network settings but does not instruct you on the specific settings required for your network It is assumed that you understand Ethernet networks in general and your particular network needs and that you can apply that understanding to make the required settings using standard Windows procedures If you need help with these procedures contact your network administrator To configure the network settings 1 If you normally operate your Turbo iDDR in front panel mode you should connect a keyboard mouse and VGA monitor before proceeding These are required for accessing the Windows network configuration tools You may need to restart Windows after making connections to make the mouse and keyboard operational EEDE Connect keyboard mouse and monitor N boo o CAUTION The Turbo iDDR is not a general purpose Windows A workstation The Windows configuration on the iDDR has been specifically set for use as a real time device The Turbo iDDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley Support This includes but is not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not in
98. 9 07 02eg Siding Lisht L300 03 07 OL 00003 As the World Turns LDO G3 07 01 0000 Ceysot Gurlyes D MGW OOF Ot Cr PHI Le pII 02 0000 Dpras E Section 3 Eerh everina LAUU WSU UU Uae MEWE Pei AWA AS Seinfeld LE WI UU Fred PSS hare LYS Wp UI UL iag oF tos el L390 03 02 DWT aa The Simpi M Ssetior 4 Prin stinne 2000 09 09 LA survivor SLU IU UL CS ae WL PEO 00009 OL Les and Crda E Section 5 bebe nigh 2500 0303 Of2 00000 02 Cevid Letena S00 0303 Geo Semen Oise 15 WEE RUL clit on gt gt Plager l Placing 1 Gx List 16 Cartine Dr Iil Select View Fullscreen to fill the entire channel pane with only the selected channel This is useful when you need more room to display information such as a long list in Playlist mode To return to split screen select View Split Screen Turbo iDDR User Guide 119 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Channel modes in AppC enter AppCenter channels have modes for performing essential tasks When AppCenter starts each channel comes up in a mode See Selecting the channel mode on page 124 Channel Mode User Interface Channel Essential Tasks Name Type Required Recorder mr Recorder Recording clips A Clip lt no clip leatiad gt a In Out Length gt e5 EIKELILD 4 Player Control View
99. Center Workstation can be used to manage media when the iDDR is in front panel control mode When the front panel display requires text entry for example to name a clip the external keyboard output is switched from AppCenter to the front panel display Viewing the Clips Pane The Clips Pane is always displayed in AppCenter The size of the Clips Pane changes when you resize the monitor pane or the channel pane At its minimum size the Clips Pane displays a single column of clip thumbnails Click to change the current bin Search Hew Bin Assignable Asset List Buttons Image view shown here Click and hold Text or Details views are to assign also available Control Description and User Operation Current Bin Label Lookin default Displays the name and location of the current bin or the summary of the search or link operation At first time start up the current bin is V default The bin named default is on the internal disk volume Click the current bin label to change the current bin and organize bins See About the Current Bin drop down list on page 217 214 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using the Clips Pane Control Description and User Operation Context Button The operation and label of the context button changes with the mode of the selected channel Load Displayed when the selected channel is in Player mode or Recorder mode Loads the asset se
100. Click Stream NOTE The appearance of the asset list and file open dialog boxes is determined by the View Option setting Use the Clips Pane context menu to choose Image or Text view See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 4 In the Source section browse to locate and select the source file The Look in label shows the current location The list under the Look in label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list such as machine disk volume or a bin to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Look in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent source locations visited history 5 In the Destination section Bin Name displays the name of the current bin which specifies the destination bin 6 Specify a clip name if desired by clicking the Clip Name edit control 7 Click Import to start the transfer NOTE Import is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Monitoring media file transfers on page 207 to view the job status Sending media to another Turbo iDDR The iDDR supports streaming media transfers over the Ethernet connection Streaming transfers allow playout while the asset is still transferring The destination for a streaming transfer must be another iDDR The format for Turbo 1DDR streaming is SMPTE 360M gxf Turbo iDDR User Guide 205
101. Compliance EN55103 1 2 Class A Warning This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A pr scrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada This product has been evaluated for Electromagnetic Compatibility under the EN 55103 1 2 standards for Emissions and Immunity and meets the requirements for E4 environment This product complies with Class A E4 environment In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC Emission Limits This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation Laser Compliance Laser Safety Requirements Laser Safety Turbo iDDR User Guide The device used in this product is a Class certified laser product Operating this product outside specifications or altering its original design may result in hazardous radiation exposure and may be
102. If the Send To button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The Send dialog box appears 3 Click the Bin tab 4 Select Move to in the right hand drop list E Send V default ps3 Destination Mowe To Move To T to a ed ta default mybin Recycle Bin Bin Name Cancel 5 Select the target bin name 6 Click the Send button to close the Send dialog box and move the file Move is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor Refer to Monitoring media file transfers on page 124 Copying an asset The copy command creates a new asset that references the same media files belonging to the original asset Copying an asset does not duplicate the media files Copying does not impact the media storage space available The naming convention for copied assets in the same bin adds an underscore _ and a number after the original name For example the copied clip for Clip1 will be Clip1_1 Clipl_2 and so on You can copy or move assets in two ways as follows Turbo iDDR User Guide 225 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Using the copy and paste commands 1 Select the asset s in the asset list 2 Copy the asset to the clipboard using one of the following e Select Copy in the asset context menu or e Select Edit in the AppCenter toolbar then choose Copy e Use the keyboard short
103. M Pa File System is running low on disk space Delete old or Scrollable Message unused clips Message Severity Area Indicators 7 26 04 12 20 PM Communication with the network has been lost Check network connections Pa Storage 07 23 18 00 remaining 08 00 00 00 total Storage N Status Remaining icon Showing iDDR software versions To display software versions 1 Press the MENU button then use the control knob to scroll and select Tools then System Status 2 From within the System Message area press the MENU button and select Software Versions Clearing messages To clear all status messages 1 Press the MENU button then use the control knob to scroll and select Tools then System Status 2 From within the System Message area press the MENU button and select Clear All Messages All messages are removed from the System Status Display and the status icon is removed from the Status Bar 112 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Topics in this section include Introducing AppCenter on page 114 Recording clips on page 124 Playing and editing clips on page 141 Working with playlists on page 162 Importing and exporting media on page 197 Transferring media between Turbo iDDRs on page 204 Monitoring media file transfers on page 207 Managing media on page 213 Monitoring the system using the StatusBar on page 246 Turbo iDDR Use
104. Meter Bar Current and Mark Out Button Preview clips Click to adjust audio Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignment to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Goto Used to jump to a specific timecode in the current clip or skip to the preview clip See Skipping to the preview clip during playout on page 267 and Jumping to a specific timecode on page 267 Load Opens the Load Clip dialog which displays the contents of the current bin Select a clip then choose OK to load Options Opens the Options dialog box used to select control mode and control port See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 Turbo iDDR User Guide 263 Chapter 5 Remote Control Control Description and User Operation Current Frame Timecode and Stop Mode 42 97 28 42 Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode The text displayed to the right of clip timecode indicates the playback mode selection EE or PB When Eto E is selected the play channel output switches to the record channel input when playback is stopped When PB is selected play channel output freezes on the last video frame To select th
105. OY grass valley Turbo INTELLIGENT DIGITAL DISK RECORDER SOFTWARE VERSION 2 3 i 071 8401 02 JANUARY 2007 O00000 0000000 OOOO0OO0OO0O0000000 DJOOOOOOOOOOOQOOL OOOOOOOOOOOOO THOMSON images amp beyond y 2 Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status Turbo iDDR User Guide Copyright 2007 Grass Valley Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Portions of software 2000 2007 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Grass Valley Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 This product may be covered by one or more U S and foreign patents Grass Valley K2 Aurora Turbo M Series Profile Profile XP NewsBrowse NewsEdit NewsQ NewsShare NewsQ Pro Aurora and Media Manager are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Grass Valley Inc in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Grass Valley Inc products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Grass Valley Inc tr
106. Select the record button on the front panel g or use the onscreen transport controls J Recording continues until Stop is selected or the desired length is reached While recording the mark in and mark out update with the current status of the clip The Time Dome gives a visual indication of the percent complete as well as a countdown from the specified length down to 00 00 00 00 Specify clip length after recording has begun While a clip is recording you can enter the clip length as follows 1 Select Length in the Recorder pane The timecode dialog box appears 2 Enter the desired length then select OK or Enter If the entered length is valid longer than the amount of material already recorded the clip continues to record until it reaches the specified length or until you select Stop Using loop record You can configure Recorder for Continuous Record mode Continuous record 1s useful for applications that normally use Loop Record for example a manual time delay Refer to About recording clips on page 125 132 Turbo iDDR User Guide To record a clip 1 Click the Time Dome Ly The Time Dome pop up menu appears 2 Choose Continuous Record in the pop up menu INT Clip lt no clip loaded a Location local fdeFault a In Out Length 17 10 16 24 lt i CIMCO CIELE A 2 The Time Dome changes to display loop record Dp Default loop record length is 1 hour or the last record length used n
107. Sizes ME yhes Length 00 00 00 00 Created 05 0205 05 30 PM Modified 05 02 05 05 30 PM Aspect Ratio Unknown Locked Cancel Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating a clip Locating a clip You can locate the currently loaded clip by displaying the contents of the current bin in the clips pane as follows 1 After or during recording select Recorder Locate 2 The clips pane displays the contents of the bin where the clip is located Displaying available storage space In the Recorder pane you can display available storage using the Time Dome To display available storage 1 Select the Time Dome Q The Time Dome pop up menu appears 2 Choose Available Storage in the pop up menu gt The Time Dome changes to display progress and available storage Sp 00 29 30 24 Available storage displayed is based on the video data rate selected in the Configuration dialog box See Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR A filled Time Dome represents no storage remaining Available storage is also displayed numerically under the timedome The white line functions as a sweep second hand to show record progress It sweeps through a complete revolution every 10 seconds when crash recording or makes a single revolution on a fixed length record Playing and editing clips The information in this section describes how to play and edit clips recorded on the iDDR You can play clips in a variety of ways including off s
108. The Local Remote dialog box is displayed Turbo iDDR User Guide 255 Chapter 5 Remote Control Protocol Controller Port Remote Local Timecode Under Protocol control only Local and Protocol control Cancel 3 Select the remote control port as follows a Temporarily set the Remote Local option to Local and Protocol control b Use the Protocol Controller Port drop down list to choose a remote control port You can select one of the RS422 ports P1 P4 or the Ethernet port AMP only 4 If choosing AMP protocol select the Remote Local control option as required by your control system e Protocol control only Disables local control The iDDR is controlled only from the remote device The iDDR display is used to monitor the channel status and control operations as they take place remotely Local and Protocol control Local control is enabled You can use the AppCenter Workstation interface and front panel transport controls to control the channel even though remote control is enabled With this setting you must take care to avoid conflicts between local and remote control 5 If you using AMP protocol to perform video network transfers you must setup the video network and the Controller Id as described in the Installation chapter Refer to Using an Ethernet connection on page 271 6 Test the system and recheck settings if required 256 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In W
109. Type 1 Exports a Type 1 AVI file which contains a standard DV bit stream where the video and audio streams interlaced together This type of AVI file can only be read by software applications that support DirectShow This file cannot be read by applications that are only compatible with Video for Windows Non Interleaved Type 2 Exports a Type 2 AVI file which produces a VFW compatible AVI file format This file type has separate streams for video and audio and it can also be processed by DirectShow The advantage of creating an Type 2 file is that the file can be read by the older applications that do not support DirectShow Windows Media Refer to the Microsoft Windows Media support website for information on choosing the best settings for your application Turbo iDDR User Guide 101 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 102 Managing media The 1DDR front panel Clips display is used to manage the clips subclips and playlists stored on the iDDR Almost all the media management tasks you Il perform fall in the following categories Guide to using the Clips display on page 103 Working with bins on page 105 Working with assets on page 107 Erasing a clip s unused media on page 107 Working with the Recycle Bin on page 108 Viewing bin and asset properties on page 109 NOTE Additional media management features are available in AppCenter Workstation even when the iDDR i
110. User Guide 21 Chapter 1 Product Introduction 22 Convenient monitoring The front panel display includes current clip information for each channel including a thumbnail image for the clip loaded on each channel A front panel headphone jack is provided for audio monitoring The signal monitored follows the channel selection Media transfer to other devices The iDDR supports media transfers over the standard Ethernet port Supported devices for media transfers include other Turbo iDDRs or the Grass Valley M Series 1VDR You must configure the iDDR network settings prior to attempting media transfers Importing and Exporting media You can exchange media with other devices by importing and exporting files using standard file formats Files can be exchanged over an Ethernet connection to network drives or using common forms of removable media such as CD R DVD R external USB drives and flash drives The following table describes the file formats supported File Formats Supported Import Export AVI DV25 or uncompressed avi v v Windows Media wmv v v General Exchange Format gxf v v MPEG Program and Elementary Streams vy A mpg m2v m2p m2 mpeg vob Quicktime qt mov vw Importing Still images and still image sequences You can import still image files and still image sequences from local drives or network devices The Turbo 1DDR supports the following graphic file formats
111. Viewing detailed transfer job properties ccccceseeecceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaeeeees 210 Aborting a transfer job ieee ct atentutget lt a tnaccils lasincaki ese decuteostadendeck secdasdneetatemaeceorst 212 Removing transfer jobs from the Completed list cccccsseeecceseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeees 212 Managing COG ace cascade tecewenenactatuaren tones oaetive mc orueee dust inet A A 213 Guide TOUSING Ine Clips Fane egis a 214 Modifying the asset list view ccccccccssececceceseeeceeeesecceceeeeesseaeeessesaseesseaeeeeees 219 WOKING WIIN DINS caria a toner sn aeaiect sani diatensuet ceeds 221 WOKING WIT GSSC1S tans casos ein ie idl a tote tee sd 223 Working with the Recycle BIN c ccceccccsseeececeeeeeeecaeeeeeecsaueeeeeseeeeeeseeeessaaess 229 k catng ASSOUS nier ceased seeecatee eet acaties E cesar 230 Working with asset Metadata cccccccccsssecceeeesseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeessaeseeeeees 238 VIEWING asset properties lt icekaradiatvcel ek adel ule wbadeindiniee eevee 242 Monitoring the system using the StatUSBal cccccceecceeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaesseeeees 246 Interpreting StatuSPane button ICONS ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesseaeeeseeeeeas 246 Message types displayed in the StatUSBar ccccssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 247 Using the Status Pane cocicccntesar a Meee tba edn tena tiuelctahidnsias 247 Remote Control Using remote Contro
112. a disk drives and bypass the Recycle Bin a e Press Clips twice P then press Menu Sea and choose Bypass Recycle Bin NOTE Holding down the SHIFT key during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin Viewing bin and asset properties You can view the properties of all assets shown in the Clips and Bins displays including clips playlists programs and bins To display properties 1 Use the control knob to highlight the asset in the Clips or Bins display You can also touch the item in the display to select it 2 Press MENU So then choose Properties The properties dialog is displayed Bin Properties Clip Properties general Bin Properties Beauty Shots Bin Wel General Properties Clip We idefaulk 105 08 15 04 iv 24 1T NTSC DropFrame MPEG 412 MBytes 00 30 00 00 oF 03 04 04 27 PM OF 31 04 12 47 PM Clase Clip Properties media Media Properties Clip_13 Clip Wo ideFaulk Marks File OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 3000 00041507 0000 3000 0004 15 07 tew Close Turbo iDDR User Guide 109 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Monitoring operation using the Status Bar The Status Bar is located across the bottom of the front panel display and consists of a message area and status icon Topics here include e Types of messages displayed in the Status Bar on page 110 e Interpreting the Status Icon on page 111 e Viewing iDDR system log messages o
113. a timecode source then click OK Timecode Source Description LTC Timecode is read from the LTC input for the channel Generator The record channel has a timecode generator that runs in one of the following modes Time of Day The generator is locked to the Windows Operating system real time clock Start time Specifies the timecode to use when the recording starts The drop frame option is enabled when the system timing is set to the 525 line standard Drop frame timecode allows the generator to operate as an accurate clock Selecting widescreen mode You must select the widescreen attribute when recording video with widescreen aspect ratio 16 9 The attribute is saved as part of the MPEG video media file The attribute is used by the play channel to handle aspect ratio conversion For example disable aspect ratio conversion if the clip is played on a channel set for widescreen display This may occur when playing a list of clips with different aspect ratios For more information refer to About video scaling settings on page 36 Changing the current bin On the iDDR a fixed amount of disk space is reserved for storing media files the V partition Within the V disk partition your clips and playlists are stored in bins which function like directories in a file system You can organize your media by creating and removing bins When recording starts the new clip is stored in the current bin You can change th
114. ademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www thomsongrassvalley com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Grass Valley Inc Grass Valley Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Grass Valley Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description May 9 2005 Initial Release for Software Version 2 1 071 8401 00 July 11 2005 Update software version number for 2 2 071 8401 01 January 12 2007 Update software version number for 2 3 071 8401 02 12 January 2007 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Finding Information 0 cccc ccc ccccccssecseceseecseeeessesseeesseeceeeeseeseeesseeens 9 Getting MSN ormalON se E E OE 10 Grass Valley Product Support secccc ccsccccesssecseoeesezececasccesseseeesececsccndccesacesaveeneeacenceaeeete 11 Safety
115. aeesseeceessaaeaeceeseeesaaaeeeeeessaaganss 278 Defragmenting the media CLiVeS cccccssssseccceecceeeeeeeeceauseeceesaeaeeceeseessaueeseess 278 EFAS ING USCC MEd Anaic N O EE 279 Clearing the media file system cccccccecccesseeseeeeeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeessssaeeeeeseess 279 Running Storage Utility MOJE sterna a a a a 279 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts About keyboard operation ccccccseccccccccsseeceeceecceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeessaansgeeeeeesaas 282 Channel selet annta eter tet a a ncn tere eres 282 Basictransport COMTU ONS ecra a EE 282 Off speed play Controls nacion a e EEE A 283 Stop Mode transport controls cccccccceecsseeeseeceeeeeeeeceaeceaeeeeeeeceeeeeesssueeeeseeeeeeeeeees 283 Matk Pontand GUC CONINOIS oaie a a ook key clea bautias cc tiys 283 Miscellaneous CoNo Sresi E rue ee EE OAS 284 EISECONNO Stirner sstect aot deneed esas eeeeetecineeeeeh oecoeonc aes 284 PIAV ISU COMO S etcs haus teeta ite tes a cata a ee al aa T 284 Appendix B Connector Pin outs RS 422 connector pinouts csscccccesc2sscsaverecaceatsaesastaqusiaeaeenoceayesaiecce cus dadeorectneieceusceeed 285 Analog audio connector pinouts ceccccseeeecceeeeeeeceeeeeecseueeeeesaeeeeeecsaeeeeeseneesseaaes 285 GPO CONNECTOr DINOU irta EA 286 AppendixC Specifications AG power specication ssas e a ds 288 Environmental SPSCHICALONS sssaaa vende E EE E A 288 Mechanical SOGCINCAONS ccs cscue oc endoecesaneesoueeze
116. age 252 Automation System Using Remote Control Protocols over Ethernet The iDDR can be controlled by devices and applications software developed for the iDDR that use serial control protocols over the Ethernet network See Using remote control protocols on page 252 Turbo iDDR User Guide Power on and shutting down Power on and shutting down To power on the iDDR e Press the front panel standby switch to power on the iDDR At power on the 1DDR initializes then starts the Windows operating system which performs automatic logon using the Administrator user account Drive busy indicator To shutdown the iDDR e Press the front panel standby switch Or e In Workstation mode click System in AppCenter main menu then choose Shutdown in the pop up menu Select a shutdown mode then click OK E Shut Down What do you want the system to do Restart Exit To Windows Restart art the system Storage Maintenance Shut Down Cancel Turbo iDDR User Guide 29 Chapter 1 Product Introduction Dialog box shutdown modes Shutdown Mode Description Exit to Windows Exit AppCenter and display the Windows desktop Use the desktop shortcut to restart AppCenter Restart Exit AppCenter and restart the Windows operating system AppCenter will restart automatically Storage Maintenance Mode Exit AppCenter and restart the iDDR in storage main
117. age file as a 16 9 SD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting How should the image aspect ratio be converted Bars Standard to Widescreen Widescreen to Standard gt gt i Crop Standard to Widescreen Widescreen to Standard AKH bOd O Turbo iDDR User Guide 99 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control About exporting media You can export iDDR clips using standard media file formats The following table describes the file formats supported Export File Formats Supported AVI DV25 or uncompressed avi General Exchange Format SMPTE 360M gxf MPEG Program Streams mpg Windows Media wmv amp When exporting playlists or programs to a file only the GXF format is available Files can be exchanged over an Ethernet connection to network drives or using common forms of removable media such as CD R DVD R external USB drives and flash drives About sending files to external drives The following are operational considerations when sending files to external drives e Estimating clip file sizes AppCenter does not prevent you from sending a file that is larger than the space available on the target disk The transfer fails when the disk becomes full To avoid this problem check the clip size reported in the clip properties dialog box You can use this to estimate the disk space required for the clip e Best transfer performance File transfers are handled concurrently up to fou
118. ame the selected cue Create Clip same as selecting Create Clip from the Player menu See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 160 Create All same as selecting Create All Clips from the Player menu See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 160 Cue Selection cues the first selected cue point for playback showing a still frame of video for the cue point See Jump to the selected cue point on page 153 Current Frame Timecode Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played TREP The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode Cue List Displays a list of cue points that are set for the loaded clip Cue 00 00 14 28 Mark In points are listed in chronological order beginning with the mark in _00 00 18 03 point and ending with the mark out point o0 00 15 14 Mark Out Countdown Timecode Displays the time remaining in the clip To select the countdown 00 00 03 12 mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting 3 Sisto Options in the context menu Turbo iDDR User Guide 147 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Control Description and User Operation View tabs These tabs toggle between Control View and Cue Points view 3 S O S 148 Turbo iDDR User Guide Loading media for playout Loading media for playout You can load clips or programs in the play display f
119. an decided edics eed A aan es tees apie anata 297 Turbo iDDR User Guide Contents 8 Turbo iDDR User Guide Finding Information This user manual describes the Turbo 1DDR and provides instructions for configuring and operating the product in a variety of applications How this manual is organized This manual is organized around the tasks required to install configure and operate the Turbo iDDR The following describes the chapters included in this manual Chapter 1 Product Introduction Provides the product functional description and an overview of the key features Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Describes how to modify the Turbo iDDR configuration settings using the front panel display in front panel mode or using the configuration tool provided in AppCenter Workstation mode Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Describes how to operate the Turbo iDDR in front panel mode Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Describes how to operate the Turbo iDDR using the AppCenter Workstation user interface available when you connect VGA monitor mouse and keyboard Chapter 5 Remote Control Describes how to setup and operate the Turbo 1DDR using industry standard remote control protocols or GPI Input triggers Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection Describes the basics of setting up a network connection for file transfer or remote control using remote control protocols over Ethernet Cha
120. and choose from a list of items in Player the drop down list 2 Context Menu This menu changes depending on the mode of the selected channel It as becomes a menu for Recorder Player or Playlist Recorder New Clip Preview Locate Properties Options wv Widescreen 16 9 IEEE 1394 Text Entry Control A horizontal line and small dot Select to open the text entry dialog Clip My Clip Name O Eject Button Select to eject the current clip View Tabs Select one tab or the other to toggle between different views in Player m mode or in Playlist mode 2 122 Turbo iDDR User Guide Terms and concepts used in AppCenter Convention Graphical Description and User Action Timecode Entry A horizontal line and small dot Select to open the timecode entry dialog Control box 00 01 11 09 Meterbar Button Select to toggle between the Meterbar and the mode interface The Meterbar contains video and audio meters and the audio level controls q Assignable Button Some button groups are assignable The Play view button group is shown Groups here Right clicking a button opens a pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices This allows you to customize the user interface to suit your workflow Throughout the AppCenter interface you can substitute a click and hold action lasting one second or more for a right click action Terms and concepts used in AppCenter Selected channel
121. and paste to insert play events Any asset that can be selected can be placed on the clipboard and pasted into another application that accepts that type of asset For example you can copy a play event from Playlist mode on one play channel and paste it into Playlist mode on the other play channel You can also copy aclip from the clips pane and paste it into the Playlist mode The Cut Copy and Paste operations are performed by using the AppCenter s Edit menu by using the standard keyboard shortcuts CTRL C CTRL X CTRL V or by using the right click menus of cut copy and paste To insert an asset from the clips pane using the clipboard 1 In the clips pane select one or more assets 2 Copy the assets to the clip board 3 Select an insertion point in the list 4 Paste the asset from the clipboard into the list To use the clipboard to move or copy events already in a play list 1 Select the event s you wish to move or duplicate 2 Copy or Cut the selection to the clipboard 3 Select the new insertion point in the list 4 Paste the event s from the clipboard into the list 176 Turbo iDDR User Guide Playing a list Related Topics e Introducing AppCenter on page 114 e Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 e Selecting multiple assets on page 224 Playing a list Once the list is complete you can open it and play it as described in the following sections Opening a playlist To open a list do th
122. ange NTSC 525 lines 0 1715 fine clock samples PAL 625 lines 0 1727 clock samples Analog Sub pixel Delays the timing within one sample interval This setting Offset applies to analog video only and is available only if the video output type is NTSC or PAL Audio Output Timing Offset 200 ms Select the timing offset for the record channel Channel Display Audio Yes Available in the AppCenter Monitoring Meters No Configuration Manager only Turbo iDDR User Guide Modifying the front panel setup Modifying the front panel setup To access front panel settings e On the front panel press MENU oh then choose Tools using the control knob and select Panel Options or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration and click Panel Select a menu item And make settings as needed Jog Shuttle Jog Speed 1X to 1X Controls the sensitivity of the Jog Shuttle 1X to 3X knob on the front panel Shuttle Speed 16X to 16X 32X to 32X VAR Setting 0 25 X Specifies the preset play speed used when 0 5 X variable speed play is selected 0 75 X Always Start at Yes When this option is selected whenever you VAR Preset No press the VAR button the initial play speed is determined by the VAR preset setting Then you can adjust the play speed using the Jog Shuttle knob RANGE 1x normal playback speed When this option is cleared the initial play speed is determined by the play speed last set by the
123. are subsystem an error message is momentarily displayed and the symbol for the StatusPane button changes Message Type Example Message Channel Status Clip loaded clip recording no clip loaded Message Channel Error Media disks are full Cannot record the clip Message Trap Summary The system drive is at full capacity Disk recorder Message operations will fail Delete unused or temporary assets and restart disk recorder Using the StatusPane The StatusPane is used to view detailed system messages including status warning and error messages The StatusPane provides a central message area where status messages are listed The StatusPane also includes subsystem status indicators and the StatusPane menu button The subsystem status indicators display a red X when an alert message for the subsystem 1s listed in the StatusPane A yellow X is displayed when a warning messages is listed StatusPane Topics e Opening the StatusPane on page 247 e Showing iDDR software versions on page 248 e Managing messages in the Status Pane on page 248 e Closing the StatusPane on page 248 e Exporting log files on page 249 Opening the StatusPane e To open the StatusPane click the StatusPane button Be in the AppCenter StatusBar The StatusPane is displayed and you can view messages Turbo iDDR User Guide 247 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation qv ote i 05 02 2005 19 01 35
124. ark out value ESC SHIFT Turbo iDDR User Guide Conventions used in the front panel display Conventions used in the front panel display The front panel display includes touch screen controls and indicators for the control mode you ve selected Recorder Player Clips Each control mode includes some unique controls however some conventions are used in all control modes Channel Information nO CONC CNOA me Tent rA lil Storage Indicator Tool Clip Loop Record Fixed Length Buttons Properties o0 00 30 00 Control v default In 7 l 00 00 00 00 Scroll Indicator Out IEFF 1394 Some displays 00 00 03 21 MENT lipk On lecorder T io ile jeleteifalrre Status Bar The following table explains the front panel display conventions Control Description and User Operation Channel Information Channel Label Displays the delegated channel number In this case the first and only R4 recorder R1 The channel label appears in the upper left corner of every display and menu Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source selected for the 0 0 0 0 0 3 24 channel Text color is white during record and dimmed at other times The timecode value of xx xx xx xx is displayed when the timecode source is not present or is invalid Countdown Displays the time remaining in the clip for a fixed length record For other recordin
125. ars Clip_1 Properties x j Name Clip_1 Add Data Type Clip H Location Vi fdefault General Clear Media Modify Cancel 3 Click the Data tab then click Add Data or Modify on the data page E Add Data Eg Create a new meta data tag with the following attributes Name Creator Type String String Value Integer Float Date Boolean 4 Define or modify metadata using the following steps a Select Name then enter the metadata name in the Name dialog box Names are not case sensitive Episode and episode are treated the same You cannot modify names of existing metadata See also Deleting asset metadata on page 241 b Select Type then choose a data type from the drop down list Metadata types include String Integer Float Date and Boolean Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 238 Turbo iDDR User Guide 239 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation c Select Value then enter a metadata value in the Value dialog box d Click OK to close the Add or Modify dialog box and save changes Your changes appear in the Properties dialog box for this and all other assets Clip_1 Properties Clip_t Add Data General Pe cue B Location Vi fdefault Clear Media Creator Operator_1 Date 05 28 03 Modify Cancel Clearing metadata Clearing metadata removes the value entered for the selected metadata but does not delete the metadata name
126. ayer ___ lt gt gt D 7 pe PB ELLENA lt no clip loaded gt Player 1 Clip 2 playing 1 00x In workstation control mode the front panel has limited use e Control play out using front panel transport controls e Monitor channel status e Select a channel Enabling the workstation control mode Select View Workstation to switch to workstation control mode Likewise select View Front Panel to switch to front panel control mode Upon restart the Turbo returns to its last control mode Refer to Turbo iDDR control modes on page 27 for more information about the different control options for a Turbo 1DDR Shutting down AppCenter and Windows To shut down AppCenter do one of the following e Click the standard Windows X button in the title bar or e Select System Shutdown The Shutdown dialog box opens 116 Turbo iDDR User Guide Shutting down AppCenter and Windows W Shut Down What do you want the system to do Restart Exit To Windows Restart art the system Storage Maintenance Shut Down Shutdown options are as follows Shutdown Mode Description Exit to Windows Exit AppCenter and display the Windows desktop Use the desktop shortcut to restart AppCenter Restart Exit AppCenter and restart the Windows operating system Storage Maintenance Mode Exit AppCenter and restart the iDDR in storage maintenance mode to allow maintenance on the media disk subsystem
127. aylist mode List View Control Description and User Operation Time Cursor l es pe f OL sepe LA The time cursor indicates the current play position The time cursor is displayed over the event currently being played Event List The Event List contains play events Play events are created from clips or programs which can be added to the list in two ways drag and drop from the clips pane or using the Insert button in List view Event view or in the clips pane By default play events added to a list inherit the source clip s name but you can rename events anytime Play events and sections can be configured to trigger GPI outputs GPI triggers can be set to occur when the event or section starts ends or at these points plus or minus some offset A GPI trigger does not disrupt playout of the play events that following it See Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 190 You can view the Event List in either the text view or thumbnail view Thumbnail view displays clip thumbnails along with Time Domes for the list play progress and section play progress To change the view select Options in the Playlist menu Turbo iDDR User Guide 169 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Control Description and User Operation Playlist List View Menu Insert Event Opens the Insert Event dialog box which allows you alah to insert all event types See Inserting media in a playli
128. back Oo Rewind Hold down REW then release the button to cause the clip to return Na to the previous mode Fast Forward Hold down FF then release the button to cause the clip to qe return to the previous mode Frame reverse Tap and release the REW button i Frame advance Tap and release the FF button gt I Turbo iDDR User Guide 51 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Cue to beginning of clip Hold down STOP or SHIFT then press REW o Sa Or seol 144 Cue to end of clip Hold down STOP or SHIFT then press FF oO i Or scl i Play from the beginning of the clip Press PLAY or SHIFT then press b lhe REW a Ee 4 Go to the end of the clip Press PLAY or SHIFT then press FF TINE Ot sc i Using the Control Knob Jog Press JOG then turn knob Playback advances or retards one frame ata Control Knob time according to the direction and rotational speed of the knob The range of jog speeds is 1x NOTE Range of jog speeds can be set for 1x or 3x Shuttle Press SHTL then rotate the knob for 32x to 32x normal playback speed NOTE Range of shuttle speeds 16x or 32x Variable Speed Play slo mo Press VAR Off speed play begins You can rota
129. be deleted Turbo iDDR User Guide 227 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 228 Erasing a clip s unused media After editing a clip by moving the mark in mark out points the remaining portion of media outside the marks can be erased to free media storage space If the media outside the clip marks is referenced by a subclip program or event from a playlist that media is not erased Subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming To erase unused media 1 Select the clip in the asset list 2 Open the Clip Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in See Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The Clip Properties dialog appears E Clip 7 Properties Mame Clip_ Type Clip General Location WiyideFault Parkes 00 00 00 000 00 00 04 286 Length 00 00 04 26 Erase Unused Media File 00 00 00 000 00 00 04 268 OO 00 04 26 Cancel 3 In the Clip Properties dialog box click Media 4 On the Media page select the Erase Unused Media option 5 Click OK Unused media is erased when you click the OK button and the Properties dialog box is closed After erasing unused media the fol
130. be taken out of the loop by manual intervention Loop on a list Lists can be set up to loop indefinitely The list 7 i w can be taken out of the loop by manual intervention stop or goto Pause at theend Events can pause playout at their end At event va vA of events pauses you can choose to show black show E to E freeze on last frame or freeze on next event Pause at the end Sections can pause playout at their end At section vA of sections pauses you can choose to show black show E to E freeze on last frame or freeze on next event Saving a playlist Playlists can be saved as a program This saves Y as a program the media and transitions but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as pauses In both front panel and workstation operation you can insert a program into a playlist or play a program in the standard player mode GPI output The iDDR provides 6 GPI output signals through Y Ti triggers a rear panel connector for controlling external equipment You can configure events in a playlist to trigger GPI outputs A GPI trigger does not disrupt playout of the play events GPI triggers can be set to occur at the beginning or end of an event or section or at these points with some offset Turbo iDDR User Guide 163 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Basic Feature Description Availability FrontPanel Workstation Mode Mode GPI Input triggers You can assign any of the 6 GPI inputs to
131. cal Video Reference Reference standard NTSC 59 94 Hz Reference present Reference locked Time Of Day Time of day source System Clock Audio Reference Audio reference level 0 dBu Save Load Restore Configuring system settings Transfer Monitor Monitoring media j ap Properties transfers including E r h Sare ali aara a a Sending GED one iter ga network transfers and file importing a sore pry 3 import export mt CM Audite A loted f Str porede Online Help aiani Complete documentation amp F we B Pee Dos Criat igts joshi Foal lt r ne vine xt gt Product Introduction of operational tasks Turbo iDDR User Guide 121 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Conventions used in the AppCenter interface The following table describes the graphical conventions used for the user controls in the AppCenter interface These graphical elements are used throughout the interface to indicate such items as drop down lists and text entry controls Drop down List Context Menu Text Entry Control p EE 7 Eject Button Clip Clip_ ei default 2 T R View Tabs 90 00 00 00 90 00 04 26 90 00 04 26 oe Timecode Entry Controls P joaquo y D m CULE 1 Assignable Meterbar Button Buttons Convention Graphical Description and User Action Q Drop down list A horizontal line and arrowhead Select
132. ccccecsseseceeeeeceeeseeeeeeaecaeaeeeeeessaaeeeeees 36 Video scaling considerations xcetieshccsasccaras Adee Saeciactidesabducdbradebeciubadieesiebicagbede 37 Video output Connector compatibility cccccccssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeesesseeeeseeseeeeseneeeees 38 Guidelines for selecting video data rate oo cccccseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaas 38 Configuring your Turbo DDR rss ee a a E a E 39 Modifying system settings ccccccecssscecceeeeeecceceeeeceeaseecceusaeeesseseueeesseaeeeesansees 39 Modifying recorder channel R1 settings ccccceceeeceesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseees 39 Modifying player channel P1 and P2 settings cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 BaCk OW lah aA ae tee 8 ae 8 a tes aN Oa al cae te uu crc 42 Modifying the front Panel setup cecccecsseeceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeesesaeeeeesaaes 43 SEUNG GP I MUL MIOO SIS ca5 ca shes saosin desc ceeds ae nsec eee acenenaeeentisntacs 43 setm GP MOUNDUETIIOOE S ciai a a a ia 45 AGIUSTING video otiput timih esteis a arenes ceased asta aeases 45 Using the video reference INDUut ccccsssssececcecceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeceesseaaaeeeeseeesaeeeeess 45 Vid o MNA OMMCIDICS sirsiran a a a RR E 47 To adjust video output TIMING ccceeeccceecceessseeceeeceaeeeeeeeeessueaeeeeeesseaseeeeeeeenas 47 Operation Front Panel Control Guide to using the front Panel ccccccccccceeeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeee
133. ck OK Adjusting event audio levels The audio level for each event in the list is adjusted independently To adjust the event audio level 1 With the event loaded in the Event view click the Meterbar button 2 Adjust the audio level using the graphical faders or click Unity to return audio to the last saved level 00 00 02 10 re 00 00 01 22 0 0 0 0 24 0 a a ne Gang i w ke Unity 5 20 0 I Save 2 40 0 3 Click Save to save changes to the event audio level NOTE Changing event audio levels does not affect the source clip Saved audio levels are stored and used every time the list is loaded and played Unsaved changes are lost when another list is loaded 4 Click the Meterbar button again to return to Event view Changing event thumbnail image By default an event s thumbnail is set to the thumbnail of its source clip To change an event s thumbnail 1 Select the event in List View 2 Select the Event tab to change to Event View 3 Monitor video output and use the front panel or onscreen transport controls to position the clip to the desired video frame 4 Click the thumbnail in the Event pane then click Yes in the message asking if you want to change the thumbnail image The event will now be represented by the new thumbnail If the event is the first play event in the list then the list thumbnail is updated to refer to the new event thumbnail NOTE If the you modify the even
134. ck on the section and select Cut Copy or Paste Renaming sections To rename a section 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click on the section and select Properties 184 Turbo iDDR User Guide Adding play effects W Section 1 Properties General Section 1 Location VijdeFault List_ x Change event pauses Remove all pauses Odd a pause to every event Freeze on last frame T Cancel 3 Select the section name then enter a new name 4 Click OK Adding play effects These settings determine what will happen at the end of the list section or event when the list is played Topics in this section include e To repeat at the end of a playlist on page 185 e To repeat or pause at the end of a section on page 186 e To pause at the end of an event on page 187 e To add pause to all events in a section on page 188 e To remove pause from all events in a section on page 189 To repeat at the end of a playlist You can loop on a list until you manually stop playing 1 Open the list properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Select the list icon in the event list then click the Properties button e Right click on a list and select Properties 2 Click End then choose the Repeat op
135. clip is cued and ready for play To preview a clip 1 Start the record process 2 Press or on the iDDR front panel 3 Press Menu oh then use the control knob choose Now Recording The current clip is loaded and cued in the play channel and is ready to play Turbo iDDR User Guide 67 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 4 Press i to play the clip Selecting widescreen mode You must select the widescreen attribute when recording video with widescreen aspect ratio 16 9 The attribute is saved as part of the MPEG video media file The attribute is used by the play channel to handle aspect ratio conversion For example disable aspect ratio conversion if the clip is played on a channel set for widescreen display This may occur when playing a list of clips with different aspect ratios For more information refer to About video scaling settings on page 36 To change the Widescreen attribute 1 Press MENU oh then use the control knob to choose Widescreen gt 2 Press R1 to return to the Recorder display NOTE The clip aspect ratio cannot be changed once the clip is recorded If you want to change the clip s aspect ration attribute you must re record the clip Changing the current bin On the iDDR a fixed amount of disk space is reserved for storing media files the V partition Within the V disk partition your clips and playlists are stored in bins which function like directories in a file system
136. clip that controls channel resources e Preview clip The AMP preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip NOTE If you use AMP remote protocol to perform video network transfers you must setup the video network and the Controller ID as described in the Installation chapter Refer to Using an Ethernet connection on page 271 Turbo iDDR User Guide Making RS 422 or Ethernet connections AMP Local Remote mode In Workstation control mode you can select Protocol control only or Local and Protocol control The Local and Protocol control mode allows you to control the iDDR remotely but also allows some local control at the same time Protocol control only mode You can only monitor operations on the iDDR You cannot perform any control operations locally All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled From the local iDDR you can see the control operations as they take place but you can t control channel resources using the user interface on the iDDR Local and Protocol control mode Both local and remote control are allowed Control comes from the external device but at the same time all user interface controls are enabled Local and Protocol control mode is available only when remote control is enabled from Wo
137. control a va one or more play channels and the action you want the iDDR channel s to take play VAR play cue next event or cue next section etc AppCenter Workstation includes more extensive GPI output trigger features See Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 190 a Front panel playlist mode supports this feature for playlists created in workstation mode Before using Playlist mode Read the following sections before using Playlist mode e Terms used in Playlist mode on page 164 e Symbols used in Playlist mode on page 165 e Working with programs on page 165 e Using mixed aspect ratios in a playlist on page 166 e Inserting a clip that is still recording on page 166 e Inserting a playlist in a playlist workarounds on page 166 Terms used in Playlist mode The following terms are used in the Playlist mode Term Definition Playlist A list is a sequence of events Event Events are the components that make up a list Events are created by adding a clip or program to sections in a list Section Playlists created in Workstation operating mode contain at least one section All events in a playlist are contained in sections Sections have properties that include repeat and pause A playlist can have up to 100 sections Each section can contain up to 1000 events NOTE Playlists created in Front Panel mode do not have sections how
138. cord a clip To record a clip You can record clips using the rear panel video audio and timecode input signals Be sure to refer to Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 62 if you have trouble recording If E to E mode is selected the play channel video output BNCs can be used to monitor the video input signals To record 1 Press on the front panel to view recorder display 2 Use one of the following record modes To Press Then do this Name a clip then start F F recording New Clip Specify the clip length before starting record cy Fixed Length On Use Loop record mode Loop Record On Start recording immediately N A crash record and then rename the clip later Turbo iDDR User Guide Name the clip then press Enter clip length using on screen or external keyboard then press g NOTE Record stops when clip length is reached Enter loop length then press g See About loop record mode on page 58 Press g 65 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 66 Using IEEE 1394 Record mode The IEEE 1394 FireWire ports can be used for importing and recording media from a digital recording device that uses DV or MPEG2 format After selecting the IEEE 1394 input for the Record channel you can use the iDDR transport controls to control the IEEE 1394 device remotely through the 1394 connection NOTE The rear panel port 2 top and
139. ct computer name Any differences will result in being unable to connect to the iDDR b Select the controller id control and enter the identification number of the computer you are adding E Add Host Host name Controller id Cancel c Click OK in the Add Host dialog box 5 Repeat step 4 for the remaining 1DDRs 6 In the Configuration dialog box click OK to save settings Once the host names are added the iDDR is ready for streaming operation Refer to Transferring media between Turbo 1DDRs on page 204 and Importing and exporting media on page 197 for procedures on transferring media File sharing Mapping network drives AppCenter Workstation supports media file import and export over the Ethernet network connection You must use standard Windows procedures to map a network drive in Windows operating system before it appears in the AppCenter Workstation Clips pane Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter Maintenance Tasks Topics in this section include e Defragmenting the media drives on page 278 e Erasing unused media on page 279 e Clearing the media file system on page 279 e Running Storage Utility Mode on page 279 Turbo iDDR User Guide 277 Chapter 7 Maintenance Tasks Media drive maintenance Over time you ll need to perform the following media disk maintenance tasks e Defragmenting the media drives on page 278 e Clearing the media file system on page
140. cut Ctrl C 3 If needed change the current bin to the target bin Refer to Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 221 4 Paste the asset s from the clipboard to the current bin The Paste operation is accessed in the same way as Copy NOTE If an asset is locked or in use it remains in the existing bin while the remaining assets are moved to a new bin with the specified name Using Send To 1 Select the asset s in the Asset List 2 To open the Send To dialog box using do one of following e Select Clips Send To or e Select Send To in the asset context menu or e Select the Send To button in the Clips Pane If the Send To button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The Send dialog box appears 3 In the Send dialog box click Bin then Copy to in the left hand drop list Send V default Clip_ 1 x Destination Move to 04 23 03 12 08 PM Copy to Bin Name mybin Parcel 4 Select the target bin name 226 Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with assets send V default Clip_1 Destination Move to defaut 04 23 03 12 08 PM Steam o mybin 04 23 03 12 08 PM w Recycle Bin File Bin Name mybin Eoncel 5 Click the Send button to close the Send dialog box and copy the file NOTE Copy is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor Refer to Monitor
141. d prior to switching to remote control mode 1 Press a channel button or or Ail 2 Press MENU oh then choose Remote Control using the control knob P1 00 26 00 05 00 00 04 25 MII Remote Control ae tet f MP serial sb AMP ethernet oo o0 00 00 BVA serial f uk 00 00 05 00 Subclip Edit List Player 1 Clip_ cued 3 Use the control knob to select the remote control protocol and control port The channel switches to remote control mode Press the Menu button to return to local control P1 00 26 00 05 00 00 00 00 TIL Remote AMF protocol serial port 1 To return to n clip local control press the ofa Menu button Player 1 Clip_ cued NOTE To return a channel to front panel control mode press the front panel Menu button 254 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Remote control operation In Workstation mode You can configure a channel for remote control from either front panel mode or workstation mode However operating remote control from the Workstation mode provides extended features that allow local and remote control at the same time Topics in this section include e Enabling remote control from Workstation mode on page 255 e Guide to AMP Recorder Protocol Only mode on page 257 e Guide to AMP Player Protocol Only mode on page 259 e Guide to AMP Recorder Local Protocol mode
142. d to Widescreen Widescreen to Standard AK H bOd pO NOTE Import is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 to view the job status 8 Click OK to import the file About exporting media You can export iDDR clips using standard media file formats The following table describes the file formats supported Export File Formats Supported AVI DV25 or uncompressed avi General Exchange Format SMPTE 360M gxf MPEG Program Streams mpg Windows Media wmv a When exporting playlists or programs to a file only the GXF format is available Files can be exchanged over an Ethernet connection to network drives or using common forms of removable media such as CD R DVD R external USB drives and flash drives About sending files to external drives The following are operational considerations when sending files to external drives e Estimating clip file sizes AppCenter does not prevent you from sending a file that is larger than the space available on the target disk The transfer fails when the disk becomes full To avoid this problem check the clip size reported in the clip properties dialog box You can use this to estimate the disk space required for the clip e Best transfer performance File transfers are handled concurrently up to four at a time Additional transfer requests are queued To enhance transfer performance you
143. d together This type of AVI file can only be read by software applications that support DirectShow This file cannot be read by applications that are only compatible with Video for Windows Non Interleaved Type 2 Exports a Type 2 AVI file which produces a VFW compatible AVI file format This file type has separate streams for video and audio and it can also be processed by DirectShow The advantage of creating an Type 2 file is that the file can be read by the older applications that do not support DirectShow Turbo iDDR User Guide 203 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Format Export Settings Comment Windows Media Refer to the Microsoft Windows Media support website for information on choosing the best settings for your application NOTE Export is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Monitoring media file transfers on page 124 to view the job status If the operation fails for any reason the asset is deleted from the target location Transferring media between Turbo iDDRs This section includes the following e About transferring media on page 204 e Transferring media from another iDDR on page 204 e Sending media to another Turbo 1DDR on page 205 About transferring media You can transfer media to and from the Turbo 1iDDR as streaming media using the Import Stream and the Send to Stream features The 1DDR supports streaming media
144. de is enabled disabled in the application running on the channel Refer to Selecting E to E mode on page 76 Field This is the default setting and uses the interpolated content of one field for both fields during still play for a one field freeze This mode eliminates the motion jitter that can be present in Interlaced mode Frame This mode displays two fields in still Interlaced play mode for a two field freeze With this mode you might see some motion jitter in still play Turbo iDDR User Guide 41 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR 42 Select a menu item And make settings as needed Video Output Test Mode On Temporarily displays 75 colorbar cont colorbars Off signal on the channel output This setting is for test purposes only so it is not saved ProcAmp Video Gain 0 255 These controls adjust the color balance Control i ideo i Chroma Gain 0 255 in the video image and should only be adjusted to correct a problem with a Chroma Phase 127 to 128 faulty clip or with external output Black Level 0 15 equipment Otherwise leave these Sharpness controls at their default settings 0 12 Video Output Frame Offset Delays the video output Range NTSC 0 1 frames PAL 0 3 Timing frames Line Offset Delays the video output Range NTSC 525 lines 0 524 coarse lines PAL 625 lines 0 624 lines Sample Offset Delays the video output R
145. descreen format you must select widescreen mode for the recorder This attribute is saved with the clip and is used to control video scaling when the clip is played See Video scaling considerations on page 37 1 Press MENU then choose Widescreen to toggle the setting 2 Press R1 to return to the Recorder display NOTE The clip aspect ratio cannot be changed once the clip is recorded If you want to change the clip s aspect ration attribute you must re record the clip Turbo iDDR User Guide Before you record Recorder settings checklist Record Channel Setting Procedure Adjust audio level if needed You can use the audio leveling feature to adjust the analog or digital audio input levels excluding dolby encoded digital aes ean a R1 00 00 03 21 00 00 27 09 Il 1 In the Recorder display touch the Audio 4 button Clip_13 00 00 30 00 Wo ideFaulk In 00 00 00 00 uk 00 00 03 21 Kecorder 1 Clip_13 recording 2 Use the touch screen or control knob to adjust graphical faders Only the selected faders are adjusted Pushing on the knob cycles selection between both left or right channels OF Select Restore Unity to return the audio record level to the incoming audio input level NOTE Increasing audio level reduces available dynamic range and may cause audio clipping depending on audio content 3 Press the ESC SHIFT button to return to the Recorder display
146. e current bin to determine where you want the clip stored The current bin name is displayed under the clip name in the Recorder display for example V default NOTE Changing the current bin affects the recorder and the player modes To change the current bin 1 Make sure the record channel is selected 2 In the clips pane click the Current Bin label then choose a bin from the list We default Organize Bins default Recycle Bin mybin Turbo iDDR User Guide 139 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 140 Related topics e Creating a new bin on page 222 e Renaming a bin on page 223 Renaming a clip You can rename a clip during or after recording To rename a clip 1 Select the clip name control Clip Clip_1___ in Recorder mode 2 Enter the new clip name using the on screen keyboard 3 Click OK or press Enter If a clip with the new name already exists in the current bin an error message 1s displayed Viewing clip properties To view the properties of a clip loaded in Recorder mode In Recorder do one of the following e Click the Properties button OFT e Select Recorder Properties NOTE To learn more about the Clip Properties dialog box Viewing clip properties on page 140 W Clip_12 Properties F Mame Clip_12 Type Clip Location VijfideFault Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Format HTSZ Mon DropFrame Compression MpegStdDeF
147. e New Event Current Event Name amp countdown View Click to open the new Frame Section Timecode Tabs event dialog then select Timecode a clip to make an event Click to rename 00 00 02 177 M 00 00 12327 ps 3 Section enot in list p Avent In Event Out Length OoO ON 02 17 OO 00 15 15 OO 00 12 268 OO 00 12327 Event Caan Insert or Goto Time Dome Thumbnail M Event In Event Out Accept Click to enter Click and hold Sets the In or Out goto timecode to change event point to the current thumbnail or view frame Note Insert adds new event to the list event properties Accept propagates changes made to an existing event to the event in the list Control Description and User Operation New Event Button Clicking the New Event button opens the New Event window where you can select a clip to load into the Event window You can also drag and drop clips onto the Event Name control in the Event View Event Timecode Displays the event s timecode This is the source clip s recorded fd timecode It may be helpful when searching for a particular portion 01 01 25 16 P ma P of the media to set event marks Event Name Control Displays the event s name and section in the list To rename the Event Clip 7 event click the event name control then enter a new name If no Section Section 1 event is selected when you switch to the Even
148. e Selection in the Goto pop up menu Then press Play Avoid delays when jumping to a new event or First select the new event or section then wait until section the diamond or standby icon is filled in before jumping to the new event or section Turbo iDDR User Guide 177 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 178 To Do this Use keyboard shortcuts to play the play list See Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 Use GPI input triggers to play the play list See Configuring GPI inputs on page 121 Editing and rearranging events in a playlist The following topics explain how to work with events in a playlist e About editing events while the list is playing on page 178 e Creating an event before inserting it in a playlist on page 178 e Editing event marks on page 179 e Clearing event marks on page 181 e Moving events on page 181 e Removing events on page 181 e Copying events on page 181 e Renaming events on page 181 e Adjusting event audio levels on page 182 e Changing event thumbnail image on page 182 e Locating the event source clip on page 183 e Viewing event properties on page 183 About editing events while the listis playing If the List view is playing a list you cannot monitor video and audio of an event when you switch to the Event view The channel resources and video audio outputs are being used by the List
149. e first of a set of sequentially numbered files First of a numbered Select if importing a still image to be displayed for a fixed period sequence of time What is the duration Enter a duration using the timecode entry numberpad What is the input frame format PC VGA XGA For computer generated images files During import the image is etc gammaz corrected deflickered and resized to a title safe area Gama correction modifies mid range color tones leaving the extreme tones untouched Compensates for different PC monitors and their display characteristics The image is assumed to have square pixels HD 1920x1080 Images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout rate is 59 94Hz 59 94Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1920x1080 HD 1920x1080 The images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout 50 Hz rate is 50Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1920x1080 HD 1440x1080 Images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout rate is 59 94Hz 59 94Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1440x1080 HD 1440x1080 The images are HD frames and have square pixels The playout 50 Hz rate is 50Hz interlaced The playout picture size is 1440x1080 What type of clip should be created HD Imports the image file as an HD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting SD 4 3 Imports the image file as a 4 3 SD clip at the current iDDR frame rate setting SD 16 9 Imports the im
150. e following 1 Select Playlist Open List or drag a playlist from te clips pane into the channel The Open List dialog box appears 2 Locate and select the list you want to open then click Open Before the list is opened the currently loaded list is closed In Playlist mode there is no eject button so you can open an existing list or create a new list without manually closing the currently loaded list Playing a playlist You can perform the following operations to play a playlist using the front panel transport controls and AppCenter user interface You can also use the keyboard shortcuts for all transport controls See Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 To Do this Begin playing at the top of the list Open the list then press Play Begin playing at an event in the list Select an event in the list then press Play Continue playout after a pause in the list Press the Play button Play the next event Press the Play and FF buttons Or Select Goto and then choose Next Event in the Goto pop up menu Play the next section Press the Play button and hold the FF button down Or Select Goto and then choose Next Section in the Goto pop up menu Skip playback to any event or section in the list First press and hold the Play button then select the event or section using the touch screen Select an event or section to playback First select the event or section then click Goto and choos
151. e fror transport butt Cala gt fe Click and drag borders to resize or hide panes Statusbar Displays current operations and system status Main components in the AppCenter user interface The following describes the main components in the AppCenter window AppC enter Component Description Monitor pane Displays the current information for the channel Displays a thumbnail of the clip currently loaded in the channel and indicates the current control mode for the channel Contains a drop down menu for changing the channel s mode For the currently selected channel the monitor pane has a white background Channel pane Clips pane StatusBar 118 Turbo iDDR User Guide Displays each channel in its current mode Only one channel can be selected at a time The currently selected channel is displayed with transport controls View tabs and a white background Displays media stored on the Turbo iDDR and provides controls for media management Displays status and error messages AppCenter user interface overview Displaying the channel pane in full screen ApCener Workstation Pi Pleylict Fle Ed Vee Peylst Jie Help Fliteceder Th fsa 20 01 4 OO See O Ssrtiar 1 Harang magrare p 7 JOD 02 02 OS CO00 Mie Today Sro p fe i d 3200 3 05 02 0000 Live sih boyis and belly n RE A O bev 03 09 OnE0yO Thetise 3 B Ssetior 21 Gaye L100 03 02 02 0000 The Young and toc Restess L200 0
152. e inactive depending on the play channel video type selected e You can only set a clip s aspect ratio attribute when it is recorded Once a clip is recorded or imported you cannot change the attribute If you want to change the clip s aspect ratio attribute you must re record or import the clip e In some cases you might want to deliberately set a clip s aspect ratio attribute incorrectly For example if a widescreen clip is being recorded on the iDDR and it already has an aspect ratio treatment such as letterbox as part of the media itself you would not want to again apply letterbox bars when the clip is played out to a SD output double boxing In this case if you know the clip is destined for a SD output you can set the widescreen clip s attribute to standard screen so that no aspect ratio conversion takes play on the SD playout e The Turbo iDDR can play clips with different aspect ratio attributes in a single playlist Turbo iDDR User Guide 37 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Video output connector compatibility The following table shows which video output connectors are active depending on the play channel video type setting Use the table when making cable connections To change play channel video type refer to Adjusting video output timing on page 45 Play Channel Setting Video Output Types Available Video Type Resulting Aspect S Video SDI Settin
153. e is started To start Playlist mode on a play channel in the channel s monitor pane select the mode drop down list and choose Playlist The channel switches to Playlist mode and becomes the selected channel Guide to using Playlist mode List View The Playlist List View allows you to manage a list insert move or modify events and to control playout of the list Clicking the Listtab displays the List view You can select the type of display for the asset list text view or thumbnail view See Selecting Text or Thumbnail view on page 173 The following describes the basic controls in the List View List view in text display mode Playlist Section Countdown view Timecode A playlist has at Can display time Tabs least one section to next event section or end of list AS 01 00 00 00 ee List_9 eei E Section 1 C re pE EHE E EEEE 01 00 26 16 Clip 7 01 00 31 12 Clip 8 m F D 01 00 36 002 Clip _o 5 1 01 02 18 Clip_11 aN h rlen eNO a al Assignable Time Cursor Event List Text View Buttons Displays the current Default buttons play position are shown Turbo iDDR User Guide 167 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation List view in image display mode O Section 1 O7 00 00 00 00 00 12 28 TE Applenter a Cao o COCCI e ala op Event List Image View Time Domes display list and section play progress Control Description a
154. e playback mode refer Selecting E to E mode on page 150 Clip name amp Current Bin Clip Clip_ 2 Location Ys fdetault Displays the current or preview clip s name and location in the video storage file system You can toggle between current and preview clip name by clicking the thumbnail image To rename the clip touch or click the clip name then use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter a new name Countdown Timecode 00 07 06 1 7 Indicates the time remaining for the clip Current and Preview Clip Thumbnail Used to visually identify the current clip loaded in Player When AMP and VDCP protocols are used the thumbnail includes the current and preview clip You can click or touch the thumbnail image to toggle between the preview and current clip thumbnails This allows you to identify the preview clip before it plays Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip Time Dome Progress Dd 00 00 03 23 Progress OB with media marks 00 00 02 15 Progress amp loop play 00 00 08 21 enabled This control displays play progress or play progress with media marks which shows the relative position of mark in mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play time remaining The Time Dome is also used to enable and indicate loop play mode Select and hold the Time Dome then selec
155. e playlist timecode on page 193 e End see Locking a playlist on page 193 Saving a listas a program Playlists can be saved as a program so that they can be managed as a single clip This saves the events in the list but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as pauses between events or sections Saving a list does not consume media storage space since the program merely references the source clip media that is already stored in the media file system If the source clips are deleted the media referenced by the program is preserved See Deleting an asset on page 227 You can insert programs into other playlists or load and play them using the standard Player mode In Player mode you can edit the program mark in and mark out points providing the source clips referenced by the program have not been deleted If that is the case 1 second of media is preserved before and after the program mark in and mark out allowing some trimming 1 Load the playlist in the Playlist mode 2 In List view select Playlist Save As Program Turbo iDDR User Guide 195 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation save As Program x Look in V NewsClips r a me ea Clip 2 Ls ak P ee so ft ri E E Clip_5 List_1 Program Name Program_1 Cancel 3 Use the Look in control to change the current bin if required 4 Select the Program Name text entry control to change the program name then click OK The
156. ea eee a ee ae ele eee ane el eee cad 100 WAM AGING Meda essaies a e a e E 102 Guide to using the Clips display cccecccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessaaeasaeaeeeeeeeeeees 103 WOKING WIEN DINS sizene EA a E R 105 Working WiIIT assets eiiiai i a EA E E E anaE 107 Rename aSSelS oras a a R E A 107 BB Ye 2 oir shoe Anise e ee A eee 107 CODY OF MOVE assie cite ML Se et ce et 107 LOCK ASSES A scecie seed a E 107 select multiple assets n a Dieese a E a 107 CLEC AIASSONS ea a r a a aceh deere 107 Erasing a clip s unused MEMIA ccccseeeeeeeccseeeeececeecceeaeseceeeceassaeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeaas 107 Working with the Recycle BIIN cceccccssseeecceeseeeeceeseeeeceaeceeeceeseeessaeeeeesaaess 108 Viewing bin and asset properties cccccseececeeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaesseeeeesaeseeeeees 109 Monitoring operation using the Status Bar seennsnsesensennenrnnnnrrressrrrrrrrrrenenen nnn 110 Turbo iDDR User Guide Types of messages displayed in the Status Bal ccccccccccseeseeeeeesetseeeeeeeeeas 110 Interpreting the Status ICONS ee cel ees cczs esac cece ce seleauzavavedcsne E ESA 111 Viewing iIDDR system log MESSAGES ccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeceseeeeeeesseeeeeaeeeeesaeeeess 111 Chapter 4 Operation AppC enter Workstation Introducing AppCenter caieteian ela ee eed en ee eee ee 114 Stan INO ADO COMIC eminen reeset O a tatecsaceieianciancali 115 Using AppCenter in front panel control MOCE
157. ecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeneeas 190 Managing PlaVliSl essenin a auntdediceas ts cagcemeentaeee 191 Saving a listas as program reestackey aac Seadisnete ceed ia ear ii 195 Importing ANd exporting MECIA ccccccccceseseeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseseeaeeeeeessaeeseeeeeas 197 Abo t importing media sssr Ata eesti cee meet 197 TO import a video file ee cee eecccceeeeeeccsseeeeceeseeecceeeseeeceauseeeceusseeesseseeeeesaneeesessass 197 POsMORL asS ull IMACS TNC estan Fees ioed spha E E ATENA 198 PDOUTEXDOMING ICCA isc ct 22sec a teak oe sewed nena adens a E 201 TEEXPON MERA ase cerns eee teeters tte ee a ener teers eee 202 Transferring media between Turbo IDDRS cccceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeaeseeeeees 204 Abouttranstering INGA ea fa sici0 secant sched cade bia lub gncueanch ENE 204 Transferring media from another iDDR ccccceseecccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaesseeeees 204 Sending media to another Turbo iDDR ccccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeseaeaeeeeeeeeees 205 Monitoring Media file transfers cccccccecseseccnseececeeeececseneueecsesseeeeseeseeesseneeesssaes 207 Starting the Transfer MONnitOr cccccceccseseeccecceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 Transfer Monitor pages and buttons ccccecceccseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseesseeeeees 208 Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer MOnitOr cccccseeseeeeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaess 210
158. ecode files in the media file system Source clip Find the source clip from which a subclip was created Subclips Find all subclips created from the selected clip References When a playlist or program is selected find all the assets that are referenced by the playlist or program When a clip is selected find all the playlists and events that reference that clip Same bin Generate a list of assets that are located in the same bin 4 Click Find Now The results of the link operation are displayed in the Clips Pane The text in the Current Bin label is replaced by a brief summary of the links operation NOTE Unlike the search results link results are not cached You must perform the Links operation each time to discover linked assets Turbo iDDR User Guide 237 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 238 Lookin Links Subclips of Clip_1 Proper Clip_1 1 05 14 03 04 45 PM Clip_1 2 05 14 03 04 45 PM Working with asset metadata The properties dialog box displays information about an asset as described in Viewing asset properties on page 242 The properties dialog box also includes a user defined metadata feature that allows you to define and add your own information about an asset You can specify the metadata name data type and value The metadata you add for one asset automatically appears on properties pages for all existing and future assets except with no value entered T
159. eeeeseeses 151 Using Cue points for playOack cccccccsssseecccceecceeseeceeceeeeeeeeesaeseeaeeeeesesaeeseees 152 Editing A Claren n E re a E 154 Grea MO SUDCIID Saenen a a 158 Locating the clip loaded in player ccccecseeeecceeeceeesseeeeeceaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesseasenes 161 VIEWING Cp Propere S esea a E 161 WOKO WIHT DIA VISES siran a a a a a ee 162 MroduUCNA Playlist Mode suir a a a E E E 163 Before USING Playlst MOdE visirani ninina ran a a napina LT 164 SElECTING PIAVIStMOd Ezana an a E eee nettalbaeee 167 Guide to using Playlist mode List ViOW ccccccccceceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaaeeeseseess 167 Guide to using Playlist mode Event VieW cccccccccsssessseeeeeeeeeeesessesaeeeeeseees 170 Selecting Text or Thumbnail VIOW cccccccceeeesseseeeeeeeeeeecaeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneaas 173 Selecting monitor information seseriai Revd dented a a e 173 Creating a simple playlist ccccccccccccceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeanaaas 174 Turbo iDDR User Guide Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 inserting media im a Playlistin iranerne aaae eaaa sors a aE 174 Play No alis ea E E E EEE 177 Editing and rearranging events in a Playlist ccccseccccecseeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesaaeees 178 Managing sections iN a TSt a a a 183 Adding play effects amna aa deutenuse Mawacemibeuseasumieanueenea sce eaance 185 Adding GPI output triggers to playlists ccceecccc
160. eeeseeeeeeeseeeaaegeneees 50 Enabling front panel control MOdE c cccccseseceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessaaeees 50 Locking the front panel cccccsescecccsseeceeceeeceecceaeceeceeueeececeaseeseseseesseseneesaseess 50 Using the front panel CONtIOIS cccccssssseeeececcseeeeeseeecaeaeseeeesseaeaeeeeeeessaeeeeess 51 Conventions used in the front panel display ccccccccccssessseeeeeeeeeeessaseaeeeeeseees 55 Recording CDS tae cated asauih hoch tet ot acaeemsinogsebigard mb e sian dtees 57 ADout recording CiD Sea E a a N 58 About loop record mode is xccccncececassccezecdessedaeegec teen udenieed ni sectesseseeiecnatceuieieseeeee 58 Guide to using the front panel Recorder display ccccccceessseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeas 60 Before you record Recorder settings checklist ccccccsseeeeececeseeeseeeeeesaeaees 62 Features in the Recorder Context MEN ccccccccsesseeceeeceseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeseaeaees 64 TO FE CONOSANC IO eta tect ee cen a a e e aa Gdodelaetcees 65 Using IEEE 1394 Record Mod rn isinin icini ir e an 66 Previewing a Clip that is recording cccccceeeececeseeeceeceeeeeeecaeneeeesaueeeesesaeeeeesaaes 67 Turbo iDDR User Guide Contents 4 SelECtING WIDESCFEEN MOE sirain a a E 68 Ghangino the curent DiN sessast a eer eer tiene te eee ee nearer 68 Bical LAI ale T ODs eer eee rte tn tare aie eter ett eet ran Saree eters oer nett en areas tree ent 69 Viewi
161. eference loop through connector The loop thru must be terminated using a 75 ohm terminator unless the signal is cabled looped through to another device A synchronizing generator or composite analog signal from a stable video source can be used as a video reference signal VIDEO REFERENCE OG lt gt Reference in out GA ae lt Reference in out OR Reena nase 3 EL 75 terminator ae AE CMPST Y S Vidi VIDEO REFERENCE LTC Out me _ oper SVaeo wibeonerenence creo La oureur norso raven spor Soi Composte _svaco rei HD SD PLAYER S PDIF eee RS 422 ree RS 422 OHD Da Ch 1 P2 Ch2 46 Turbo iDDR User Guide Video timing principles Video timing principles If a video reference signal is used to synchronize the iDDR all video outputs are zero timed that is the video output delay exactly matches the video reference signal timing You can use the iDDR video timing controls to make playout timing adjustments to compensate for propagation delays through cabling and equipment in the video system This ensures that the iDDR output signals can be combined and switched with other signal sources smoothly NOTE The iDDR video output is not zero timed in E to E mode and should not be used in a timed video system E to E mode is provided for monitoring purposes only and is not intended as a program switch See About E to E mode on page 23 To adjust video
162. elect Done in the onscreen keyboard or press Enter on the external keyboard Lock a playlist See Locking the front panel on page 50 View information about a 1 Select the playlist button using the control knob playlist 2 2 Press MENU So then choose Properties using the control knob Rename a playlist 1 Select the playlist button using the control knob 2 Press MENU So then choose Rename List using the control knob Locate a playlist in the Clips 1 Select the playlist button using the control knob pane 2 Press MENU So then choose Locate using the control knob The Clips pane opens to the bin where the playlist is located NOTE Playlist metadata created in Workstation cannot be viewed in front panel mode Select multiple items in a playlist Press MENU ie then choose Multiple Selection using the control knob This alls you to select several events in the playlist rather than have each new selection un select the previous item 92 Turbo iDDR User Guide Managing playlists To Do this Select all events in the playlist Press MENU fe then choose Select All Events using the control knob All eveins in the playlist are selected Turbo iDDR User Guide 93 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Editing a playlist e Adding media to a playlist on page 94 e Rearranging events in a playlist on page 94 e Removing events from a playlist on page 95 e Adjusting ev
163. elect a cue point in the list 2 Do one of the following e Click the Cue Selection button if you have one or e Select Player Cue Selection or Turbo iDDR User Guide 153 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation e Click the Goto button then select Selection 3 Press the Play button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls Playout starts from the cued frame J ump to the next cue point Use the following steps to jump to the next cue point Depending on the current play position the clip will cue to the next cue point in the clip 1 In Cue view do one of the following e Click the Next Cue button or e Click the Goto button then select Next Cue 2 Press the Play button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls Playout starts from the cued frame Renaming a cue point 1 In Cue view select a cue point in the list 2 Select Player Rename 3 Use the text entry dialog to enter a new cue name then click OK or press Enter Editing a clip Topics in this section are as follows e Moving clip mark in mark out points on page 154 e Clearing mark in mark out points on page 156 e Adjusting clip audio level on page 156 e Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 157 e Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 157 e Renaming a clip in player mode on page 158 Moving clip mark in mark out points Every clip has a mark in point a
164. elow the current view Nothing to scroll Status Bar Displays messages that indicate the current state of the channel selected For more information refer to Monitoring operation using the Status Bar on page 110 Recorder 1 Clip is recording Recording clips The recorder display is used to record clips on the iDDR You can play the clip while it is still recording or you can finish the recording and then play the clip or add it to a playlist This section includes the following topics e About recording clips on page 58 e About loop record mode on page 58 e Guide to using the front panel Recorder display on page 60 e Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 62 e Features in the Recorder context menu on page 64 e To record a clip on page 65 e Using IEEE 1394 Record mode on page 66 e Previewing a clip that is recording on page 67 e Changing the timecode source on page 1 e Selecting widescreen mode on page 68 e Changing the current bin on page 68 e Renaming a clip on page 69 e Viewing clip properties on page 69 e Locating a clip on page 69 Turbo iDDR User Guide 57 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control About recording clips Select record channel signal inputs Before you start recording you may need to select video audio and timecode inputs Refer to Modifying recorder channel
165. end them to Thomson Grass Valley support for analysis Exporting log files using the Windows command line This procedure allows you to export log files even if AppCenter does not start properly It uses the Windows command prompt 1 In the Windows task bar select Start Run 2 Type the following in the Run dialog box then click OK Ci prorile exportlog Turbo iDDR User Guide 249 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 250 Oo N HN a A W The ExportLog dialog box is displayed ExportLog Save in Desktop My Computer My Network Places File Name my_i DR_Log In the ExportLog dialog box browse to locate the destination directory Select the File Name edit control then enter a file name for the exported log file Use the Logs tab to select the log files to export Click Export When the export confirmation message appears click OK Retrieve the log files and send them to Thomson Grass Valley support for analysis Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 5 Remote Control Information in this chapter includes e Using remote control protocols on page 252 e Using GPI input and output triggers on page 269 Turbo iDDR User Guide 251 Chapter 5 Remote Control 252 Using remote control protocols You can control the iDDR using remote control devices and applications software developed for the Turbo iDDR that use industry standard serial control protocols You can enable re
166. ent audio levels on page 95 e Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 96 e Pausing at the end of an event on page 97 Adding media to a playlist You can edit a playlist by adding new media 1 Use the control knob to select an event in the list The media you add to the play list is always inserted after the currently selected event DA 2 Press CLIPS to open the Clips display then use one of the following steps to insert media e Double touch a clip or program image or e Use the control knob to highlight a clip then push in the control knob to insert 3 Press ESC g to close the Clips display 4 The change is automatically saved Rearranging events in a playlist You can rearrange events in a playlist so they play out in a different order 1 Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist 2 Do one of the following Press MENU fA then choose Lift OFT Rotate the control knob to select an event then push in on the knob to select Peale ted ead q i i 2 Mark s Kids List_1 Marks Kids 02 30 00 00 01 29 00 00 00 05 30 00 00 05 30 00 2of4 In 00 00 00 00 Gut Clip_9 Clip_10 00 00 05 00 OO 00 30 00 O0 29 30 00 Player 1 Untitled List playing 94 Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing a playlist The selected event is displayed showing a folded corner to indicate it can be moved 3 Rotate the control knob to move the cursor to the desired position then push in
167. er a ok relative timecode ez i Absolute O Select to enter an absolute timecode le 2 Perform one of the following Scrub bar Click and drag to cue the desired frame e Enter a relative timecode value select the or key enter timecode then click OK e Enter an absolute timecode value select the key enter timecode then click OK e Click and drag the scrub bar jjji to cue the desired frame Turbo iDDR User Guide 151 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 152 Related topics e Loading clips from the clips pane on page 149 e Loading a clip from Player mode on page 149 e Playing a clip on page 150 Using Cue points for playback Cue view allows you to add cue points to a clip You can use cue points to manage clip play out or create subclips The following sections describe how to work with cue points Topics included here e About using cue points on page 152 e Viewing the cue list on page 153 e Adding a cue point on page 153 e Removing a cue point on page 153 e Jump to the selected cue point on page 153 e Jump to the next cue point on page 154 e Renaming a cue point on page 154 About using cue points When you select Cue View a chronological list of cue points 1s displayed The list begins with the mark in point and ends with the mark out point You can add additional cue points to mark other frame
168. ernal keyboard to rename the subclip Renaming the subclip creates a new seed name For example if you rename the subclip PlayoffGame 1 to Highlight subsequent subclips created are named Highlight 1 Highlight 2 and so on 4 Use the front panel transport controls to locate the desired frame then press the MARK IN 6 button 5 Use the front panel transport controls to locate the desired frame then press the MARK OUT E button 6 Press Accept The subclip is saved and ejected then a new subclip name is created NOTE If the Accept button does not flash but instead the clip is saved and a new subclip ts loaded the iDDR is in Auto subclip mode See About Auto Subclip mode on page 82 NOTE Clicking the Eject button prior to pressing the Accept button closes Subclip mode without creating anew clip Both of these buttons are used to exit Subclip mode Turbo iDDR User Guide 81 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control About Auto Subclip mode The Auto Subclip feature changes the way that the subclip mode behaves Auto Subclip mode eliminates the Accept step in the subclip procedure In Auto Subclip mode you simply set mark in then set mark out On setting mark out the subclip is automatically generated and ejected and anew subclip name is loaded in the Subclip display Auto Subclip mode is useful when you want to create subclips while a source clip is playing You simply load a clip press play then create
169. es between iDDRs using streaming media transfers over 1Gb Ethernet e Monitor Turbo iDDR status using SNMP monitoring software Making the Ethernet network connection There are many different ways to connect your 1DDR to other computers or to a network You can connect your computer to e Another computer or iDDR using a direct cable connection This requires a cross over Ethernet cable Check with your local computer equipment supplier e Another computer or 1DDR connected through an Ethernet hub or switch Ethernet Switch 1000BaseT 1000BaseT Network Network NOTE If you are adding the iDDR to an existing network you may want to configure network settings before connecting the Ethernet cable This avoids network conflicts that can occur if the iDDR is not configured properly The following illustration shows the rear panel 1Gb Ethernet port 272 Turbo iDDR User Guide Making the Ethernet network connection J OUTPUT HD SD PLAYER SO SOO e LTC Out S PDIF Audio Composite S Video c e EER Pa SD ey O COO oO O 5 O P1 RS 422 RT RS 422 P2 RS 422 O O O O O O D 20888 2 Je CJ 2835350 080888080 CH 1 P1 CH2 cH 1 R1 CH2 CH 1 P2 CH2 _ ioe ati o ia O 0000000 jo 1Gb Ethernet Port Turbo iDDR User Guide 273 Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection 27
170. etain 1 second of media before the mark in and after the mark out e Event in becomes the first video frame of the file e Event out becomes the last video frame of the file e Clip length becomes the total file length Working with the Recycle Bin Deleted assets are placed in the Recycle Bin unless it is bypassed Assets remain in the Recycle Bin and continue to take up media disk space until the Recycle Bin is emptied You can work with assets in the Recycle Bin just like any other bin This section includes the following topics e Viewing the Recycle Bin contents on page 108 e Emptying the Recycle Bin on page 109 e Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 109 Viewing the Recycle Bin contents 1 Open the Bins display using one of the following e Press Clips twice or e Press Clips P then press Menu Goed and choose Organize Bins Beauty Shota default Archive ad Recycle Bin Player 1 Clip cued 2 Use the control knob to highlight Recycle Bin the push in to select 108 Turbo iDDR User Guide Viewing bin and asset properties Emptying the Recycle Bin Emptying the Recycle Bin contents permanently removes the assets from media disk drives e Open the Clips display or Bins display then press Menu oh and choose Empty Recycle Bin Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting You can configure the 1DDR so that deleted assets are immediately removed from the medi
171. ets 1 Use the control knob to highlight the asset in the Clips pane 2 Press MENU fo then use the control knob to choose Lock Select multiple assets in a bin Press MENU then choose Multiple Selection using the control knob This allows you to select several events in the playlist rather than have each new selection un select the previous item Select all assets Press MENU then choose Select All using the control knob All events in the assets in the bin are selected Erasing a clip s unused media After editing a clip by moving the mark in mark out points the remaining portion of media outside the marks can be erased to free media storage space If the media outside the clip marks is referenced by a subclip program or event from a playlist that media is not erased Subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming Turbo iDDR User Guide 107 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 1 Use the control knob to highlight the clip in the Clips pane 2 Press MENU oh then use the control knob to choose Erase Unused Media Unused media is erased when you select the OK button and the Properties dialog box is closed After erasing unused media the following is true e Media outside the clip marks is erased except that portion referenced by a subclip playlist event or program e All subclips and events generated from the source clip will r
172. ever when playlists created in Workstation mode are played in front panel mode section properties are used for playout just as they would in workstation mode Source Clip The clip inserted in a list to create a play event Program Playlists can be saved as a program in iDDR Workstation mode Programs created from a playlist include all the media and transitions in the playlist but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause at the end of an event Programs are also created from the loop record mode 164 Turbo iDDR User Guide Before using Playlist mode Symbols used in Playlist mode The following table describes the symbols used in the Playlist List view to describe the properties of items in the list play events sections and the list itself Symbol Description Locked The item is locked and cannot be edited Pause At the end of playout this item will cause playout to pause Loop At the end of playout the item will repeat GPI Output Trigger This event or section triggers one or more GPI outputs es gl O T Up arrow Event resolution does not match the play channel video output type The event will be up converted on play 4 Down arrow Event resolution does not match the play channel video output type Event will be down converted on play Working with programs A program is a clip generated from a playlist using the Save As Program feature in t
173. ext to the events in List view To pause at the end of an event 1 Select the event in List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Select the list icon in the event list then click the Properties button e Right click on a list and select Properties 3 Click End Turbo iDDR User Guide 187 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Clip_1 Properties x Clip_1 General ae Location Vi fdefault List_1 Section 1 GPI Pause Freeze on last frame Cancel 4 In the End page select the Pause at end option 5 Use the drop down list to choose whether to Freeze on last frame Freeze on next event Show black or Show E to E 6 Click OK The pause symbol appears next to the event in List view Related topics e To add pause to all events in a section on page 188 e To remove pause from all events in a section on page 189 To add pause to all events in a section To force a pause at the end of all section events 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click on a section and select Properties 3 Click All Events 4 Select the Change event pauses check box then choose the Add a pause to every event option 188 Turbo iDDR User Guide Adding play effects W Sect
174. eyboard or press Enter on the external keyboard Related topics e Playing playlists on page 83 Turbo iDDR User Guide Loading a playlist e Rearranging events in a playlist on page 94 e Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 96 Loading a playlist To load a playlist 1 Press a play channel button or aed 2 Press CLIPS to open the Clips display 3 Perform one of the following steps to load a playlist e Double touch a playlist displayed in the Clips display or e Rotate the control knob to select a playlist then push in the knob to load it Before the playlist is opened the currently loaded clip or playlist is ejected NOTE Playlists created using AppCenter Workstation mode may contain one or more sections For more information about sections see Terms used in Playlist mode on page 76 Playing a playlist After a playlist is loaded use the iDDR controls to play the list These controls include the front panel transport controls GPI input triggers and external keyboard shortcuts To Do this Begin playing at the top of the list Open the list then press Play Begin playing at an event in the list Select an event in the list then press Play Continue playout after a pause in the list Select the Play button Play the next event Press the Play and FF buttons OYr Press the Menu button then choose Goto and then Next Event in the Goto
175. f Inputs 1 per record channel Number of Outputs 2 per play channel Data format Conforms to SMPTE 259M Number of bits 10bits Connector BNC 75 ohm No loop through Max Cable Length 225 meters 738 ft Belden 8281 type cable Return Loss gt 15db 5Mhz to 270Mhz Composite Analog I O Parameter Specification Composite Video Standard NTSC 525 line 59 94Hz Conforms to SMPTE170M or PAL 625 line 50Hz Conforms CCIR Report 624 Number of Inputs 1 per record channel Number of Outputs 1 per play channel Connectors BNC 75 ohm The iDDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices i e VHS or U Matic VTRs low cost cameras and DVD players However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal conditioning products i e timebase correction 290 Turbo iDDR User Guide S Video I O S Video I O Parameter Specification Composite Video Standard NTSC 525 line 59 94Hz or PAL 625 line 50Hz Number of Inputs 1 per record channel Number of Outputs 1 per play channel Connectors Mini DIN 4 pin 75ohm a The iDDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices 1 e VHS or U Matic VTRs low cost cameras and DVD players However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal cond
176. figuration tool provided in either front panel or Workstation control modes to define the GPI inputs for a channel Refer to the following table H or O Setting GPI input triggers on page 43 Turbo iDDR User Guide 269 Chapter 5 Remote Control Configuring GPI output triggers Use the configuration tool provided in either front panel or Workstation control modes to define the GPI inputs for a channel Refer to the following table Y or O Setting GPI output triggers on page 45 Related topics Le i i ists aS Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 96 O Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 190 270 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection Topics in the chapter include e Overview of networking on page 272 e Making the Ethernet network connection on page 272 e Configuring iDDR network settings on page 274 e File sharing Mapping network drives on page 276 Turbo iDDR User Guide 271 Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection Overview of networking Networking lets you connect your iDDR to other computers or a private network When you connect your iDDR to a network or another iDDR or computer you can e Access files and folders on other iDDRs or computers e Control the iDDR remotely using devices and applications software developed for the iDDR that use AMP protocol over Ethernet e Transfer media fil
177. frame or freeze on next event Pause at the end Sections can pause playout at their end At section va of sections pauses you can choose to show black show E to E freeze on last frame or freeze on next event Saving a playlist Playlists can be saved as a program This saves YO as a program the media and transitions but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as pauses In both front panel and workstation operation you can insert a program into a playlist or play a program in the standard player mode GPI output The iDDR provides 6 GPI output signals through V Y triggers a rear panel connector for controlling external equipment You can configure events in a playlist to trigger GPI outputs A GPI trigger does not disrupt playout of the play events GPI triggers can be set to occur at the beginning or end of an event or section or at these points with some offset Turbo iDDR User Guide Before using Playlist mode Basic Feature Description Availability FrontPanel Workstation Mode Mode GPI Input triggers You can assign any of the 6 GPI inputs to control vA v one or more play channels and the action you want the iDDR channel s to take play VAR play cue next event or cue next section etc AppCenter Workstation includes more extensive GPI output trigger features See Adding GPI output triggers to playlists on page 190 a Front panel playlist mode supports this feature fo
178. g zero timed mode 47 video output connector compatibility 38 video output timing adjusting 45 video scaling settings 36 W web site for Thomson Grass Valley 10 Windows accessing the desktop 31 300 Turbo iDDR User Guide
179. g New Event Locate Locates the event s source clip in the clips pane See Locating the event source clip on page 183 Properties Opens the Event Properties dialog box which includes pages for setting up list timecode adding metadata and setting attributes that will occur during playback Options Opens the Options dialog box Turbo iDDR User Guide Selecting Text or Thumbnail view Selecting Text or Thumbnail view The event list in the List view has two viewing modes Thumbnail view and Text view Thumbnail view displays events as thumbnails along with the section and the list time domes The text view lists events descriptions in text format You can select which event attributes are displayed in text view Use the following steps to select the view mode best for you 1 In List view select Playlist Options The Options dialog box appears with the View settings tab selected VIEWS Text view Show Start time Thumbnail view Monitor 2 Select a view mode Text View displays events in text form including an event icon name and an additional attribute selectable using the Show drop down list Show attributes include the following Duration Name only Start time or Start time and duration Thumbnail View displays events in thumbnail form along with the event name 3 Click OK to save settings and close the Options dialog Selecting monitor information You can select the mon
180. g Resolution Ratio Composite Available oe Digital Analog Component Selectable NTSC 720 x 480 I 4 3 or 16 9 v v VTR Sony DVD Pl RGB or YPbP PAL 720 x 5761 a oo XGA 1024x 768P 4 3 or 16 92 Computer Monitor RGBHV WXGA 1365 x 768 P 16 9 10801 1920 x 10801 monitor monitor SMPTE 274M RGB SMPTE 274M YUV Aspect ratio conversion method is user selectable bars halfbars or crop Sync on Y or G when 3 wire formats are used The monitor output is down converted and not timed to the reference input It is provided for monitoring purposes only Guidelines for selecting video data rate The type of video and how it will be used largely determines the video data rate setting you should select It is important to understand the type of material you will be playing and select the appropriate setting Generally set as high as possible to obtain the storage capacity needed Also consider the following Sports footage video containing lots of motion requires significantly higher video data rates than an interview show Clips with lots of chrominance typical of many commercials require higher data rates to maintain quality Higher data rates should be used for any production work that requires multiple generations or when the material is subject to up conversion to HDTV NOTE Information about iDDR system storage capacity for different video data rates see Product overview and key features on page 2
181. g different aspect ratio conversion modes for various video input types and play channel aspect ratio settings Use the table to determine the settings required for your media type and display device Clip Play Channel Conversion Output Clip Example Aspect Ratio Mode Setting Example Comments SD 4 3 NA Output same as 4 3 Cy TY clip No rule O AO O O necessary HD 4 3 Bars No information 16 9 Letter Box lost HD 4 3 Bars amp Crop Some information 16 9 oC jo Half Letter lost Box Turbo iDDR User Guide Video scaling considerations Clip Play Channel Conversion Output Clip Example Aspect Ratio Mode Setting Example Comments HD 4 3 Crop More information HD 16 9 NA Output same as necessary SD O 16 9 Bars No information 4 3 Pillar Box lost OO SD O O 16 9 Bars amp Crop e Some information 4 3 Half Pillar lost OO Box SD O O 16 9 Crop v CJ More information 4 3 Zoom rE lost ONO a C Video scaling considerations Take the following into consideration when working with the video scaling features of the Turbo iDDR e For the highest video quality select a play channel video type that eliminates the need for up or down conversion This requires that you know how the source video was encoded For example if an imported clip was encoded at 1920x1080i1 set the play channel to the same resolution e Some video output connectors becom
182. g loop record If the recording is stopped before the fixed length is reached the resulting program duration is the time elapsed since the recording started Like normal record mode you cannot stop then start a loop recording Once record is stopped you must eject the program and create a new loop record Transferring the loop record program The loop record program cannot be transferred to a file or networked device until record is stopped Loop record storage space is not reserved Loop record is allowed to start as long as the record length you enter is less than the available storage however the storage space is not reserved For example you may have enough storage space to start the loop record but you are still allowed to transfer media or otherwise fill disk space Warning messages are displayed in the AppCenter StatusBar when available storage reaches 10 total disk space All recording is halted when media storage reaches its full threshold Pausing the loop record program in Player mode You cannot pause the loop record program in Player mode indefinitely Eventually the record length is reached and the video at the current position 1s erased As this happens the current position is advanced in 3 minute increments as the oldest unused media is erased Changing thumbnail image Thumbnail images displayed in the clips pane are generated using the 16th frame of video The thumbnail image for a loop record program appears as normal u
183. g modes crash continuous the countdown is not shown 00 00 27 09 nee Ene aun Na w Clip Properties Control Thumbnail Used to visually identify the clip or playlist The image is generated from the 16th image of the clip An empty monitor bitmap is used when no clip is loaded Once recording begins a thumbnail is shown using the 16 frame of video During a continuous record a new thumbnail is generated every three minutes once the record loop length is reached A gray monitor bitmap with the text no video is shown when the the Recorder is not receiving a video signal Turbo iDDR User Guide 55 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Control Description and User Operation x An empty monitor bitmap with a black X is used if a thumbnail cannot be created There may be a problem recording the input video When the recorder is in IEEE 1394 record mode the 1394 symbol is displayed on the when playback stops This is used to distinguish 1394 control from image displayed when not clip is loaded Audio meters E Small audio meter bars are shown in the lower right corner of the thumbnail These are used as audio signal indicators Clip Name Displays the clip s name When no clip is loaded this control shows Clip 13 lt no clip gt Clip Location When a clip is loaded that has no length such as after a New Clip menu Vi idefault selection the cl
184. ght of clip timecode indicates the playback lt gt mode selection EE or PB When E to E is selected the play channel output switches to the record channel input when playback is stopped When PB is selected play channel output freezes on the last video frame To select the playback mode refer Selecting E to E mode on page 150 Turbo iDDR User Guide 259 Chapter 5 Remote Control 260 Control Description and User Operation Clip name and current bin Clip Clip_2 Location vs fdefault Displays the clip s name and location in the video storage file system In Status view you cannot rename the clip Countdown timecode 00 01 06 17 Displays the time remaining for the clip loaded in player Thumbnail r Used to visually identify the current clip loaded in Player When AMP and VDCP protocols are used the thumbnail includes the current and preview clip You can click or touch the thumbnail image to toggle between the preview and current clip thumbnails This allows you to identify the preview clip before it plays Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip Time Dome Progress Dd 00 00 03 23 Progress gt with media marks 00 00 02 15 Progress amp loop play 00 00 08 21 enabled This control displays play progress or play progress with media marks which
185. gth 2 Locked Is True False N A Drop frame Is True False N A timecode Data Type Conditions Value Value String Like Not Like A string N A Integer Greater Than A number N A Float Less Than g Equals Between Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Boolean Is True False N A 4 Once you have added all the search criteria click OK to add the criteria 5 Click OK to start the search The search results are displayed in the Clips Pane The text in the Current Bin control is replaced with a brief summary of the search Finding linked assets The Links dialog box helps you locate assets that are related based on the links criteria that you can specify 1 In the asset list select the asset for which you want to find linked assets 2 Open the Links dialog box by performing one of the following steps Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating assets e Select Clips Links or e Right click an asset then select Links or e Click the Links button in the Clips Pane If the Links button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 Links to Clip_5 Find items with the following relationship Shared Media Source Clip Sub Clips References Same Bin Cancel 3 Choose one of the link relationships to use Link Relationship Description Shared media Find all assets that reference the same media files 1 e the same video audio tim
186. guration and click Channel Turbo iDDR User Guide 39 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Select a menu item And make settings as needed Recorder Compression MPEG Only the MPEG compression format Setup Format is Supported Recording Data 4Mb s 15Mb s Select 4 8 12 or 15 Mb s All Rate settings are long GOP Refer to Guidelines for selecting video data rate on page 38 Video Noise None Reducing video noise can improve Reduction Low picture quality at low video data rates Medium Too much noise reduction however High can cause loss of detail and create posterization artifacts It s best to experiment with different settings to achieve the best result Video Input Input Type Select based on how you connected your system SDI Choose if using SDI input O i SDI S Video Choose if using S Video input S Video Analog Composite Choose if using Composite input CMPST Analog Choose if Y Pr Pb DVD player is Component connected EN AN Pb Pr Y Audio Input Audio Input Analog Select when using analog input Type cH1 R1 cH2 Digital S PDIF S PDIF Audio Audio Input 12dB For the Analog audio input type only Trim Audio Input 16 bit PCM For the Digital S PDIF audio input Format AC 3 type only Timing Offset 200 ms Select the timing offset for the record channel Channel Display Audio Yes Available in the AppCenter Monitoring Meter
187. h asset in the bin Playlists are displayed as a stack of thumbnails You can change the video frame used to generate the thumbnail See Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 65 Text view Clip_10 Clip_4 List_5 ps 1 rclip_1 EA vtfttfahi The text view displays an icon and name for each asset and one attribute of your choice To select an asset attribute select the Show drop down list in the View Options dialog box then select one of the following attributes Attribute display options e Create Date e Modified Date e Length e Type MPEG or DV25 e Location full path The following table describes symbols shown in Text view AssetSymbols used AssetType in the Text View Clips with audio and video Video only clip Playlist Details view Mame Clip_10 be Format MpegStdDeF Clip HTS Length 00 00 00 00 Modifie Tracks Video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Mame Clip 4 Format MpegStdDeF Clip HTS Length 00 00 00 00 Modifie Tracks Video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Details view displays assets with both a thumbnail and a detailed text description If you want to sort the assets click the Sort tab then choose how you want assets sorted Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with bins View Sort h Sort by Order Name Ascending Length Descending Create Date Modified Date Cancel 4 Click OK The clips pane displays with the new view and
188. he Playlist mode A program includes all the media in the playlist but does not include any event that breaks the flow of playout such as a pauses between events You can insert programs into other playlists as an event or load and play them using the standard Player mode You can also send a program to a file or a video network stream Turbo iDDR User Guide 165 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Using mixed aspect ratios in a playlist The 1DDR can play clips with different aspect ratios in a single playlist How the media is displayed is determined by the play channel widescreen setting and clip aspect ratio The play channel determines the clip aspect ratio by examining the clip aspect ratio attribute set when the clip was recorded The following table describes how the iDDR displays mixed aspect ratios See also Video scaling considerations p on page 37 Event Aspect Ratio Play Channel Widescreen Setting Standard 4 3 Widescreen 16 9 Standard 4 3 No conversion Bars O Pillarbox o O Bars amp Crop Half Pillarbox gt Crop zoom a Widescreen 16 9 Bars No conversion Letterbox Bars amp Crop Half letterbox bOd O Using mixed video resolutions in a single playlist Playlists can contain events with different video resolutions When the list is played the media is up converted or down converted as needed to match the play channel video output type selected
189. he button assignments to best suit your workflow Right click a button to open a pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Clip Timecode 09 20 30 13 Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode Stop mode is indicated by PB Play Back or EE Eto E Refer to Selecting E to E mode on page 150 for more information on these stop modes Clip Name amp Current Bin Clip Clip_i Location default Displays the clip s name and location in the video storage file system To rename the clip click the Clip Name then enter a new name See Renaming a clip in player mode on page 158 Countdown Timecode 00 00 03 72 Displays the time remaining in the clip To select the countdown mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting Options in the Player menu 144 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using Workstation Player Control View Control Description and User Operation View tabs These tabs toggle between Control and Cue views Control is used m for playing and editing of clips During playback you can use the I Cue view to add cue points so that you can quickly cue a clip to a frame 2 Thumbnail TEE a pes Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is generated using the 16th frame of video To change
190. he clip while it is still recording or you can finish the recording and then play the clip or add it to a playlist This section includes the following topics e About recording clips on page 125 e About loop record mode on page 125 e Guide to using Recorder mode on page 128 e Before you record Recorder settings checklist on page 130 e To record a clip on page 131 e Using IEEE 1394 Record mode on page 135 e Previewing a clip that is recording on page 137 e Changing the timecode source on page 138 e Selecting widescreen mode on page 139 e Changing the current bin on page 139 e Renaming a clip on page 140 e Viewing clip properties on page 140 Turbo iDDR User Guide About recording clips e Locating a clip on page 141 e Displaying available storage space on page 141 About recording clips Select record channel signal inputs Before you start recording you may need to select video audio and timecode inputs Refer to Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 Missing or intermittent LTC timecode If LTC is the selected timecode source and the LTC signal is missing 1 e LTC not connected the current timecode display shows XX XX XX XX Also clips recorded without timecode will show no mark in mark out timecode after recording When LTC is detected but the signal is intermittent the last valid timecode is displayed a
191. he values you specify for an asset are retained with the asset for the following operations copy move and send to The metadata you define for an asset can be used as search criteria in advanced search Metadata types and their possible values are described in the following table Data Type Value Example Name Value String User defined string Producer John Doe Integer An integer value Episode 4 Float A number expressed in Version 1 2 floating point Date Date Air Date 10 31 03 Boolean True or False QA False Topics in this section include e Adding and modifying asset metadata on page 238 e Clearing metadata on page 240 e Deleting asset metadata on page 241 Adding and modifying asset metadata Use the following steps to add or modify metadata in the properties dialog box The metadata names you add will appear in the properties dialog box for all assets See also Deleting asset metadata on page 241 1 Select an asset in the Clips Pane asset list 2 Open the Properties dialog box using one of the following methods e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with asset metadata e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The properties dialog box appe
192. ia and transitions in the playlist but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause at the end of an event Programs are also created from the loop record mode Turbo iDDR User Guide 85 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 86 Symbols used in Playlist mode The following table describes the symbols used in the Playlist List view to describe the properties of items in the list play events sections and the list itself Symbol Description Locked The item is locked and cannot be edited Pause At the end of playout this item will cause playout to pause Loop At the end of playout the item will repeat GPI Output Trigger This event or section triggers one or more GPI outputs i 4 t Up arrow Event resolution does not match the play channel video output type The event will be up converted on play 4 Down arrow Event resolution does not match the play channel video output type Event will be down converted on play Working with programs A program is a clip generated from a playlist using the Save As Program feature in the Playlist mode A program includes all the media in the playlist but does not include any event that breaks the flow of playout such as a pauses between events You can insert programs into other playlists as an event or load and play them using the standard Player mode You can also send a program to a file or a video network
193. ick Clear then OK to clear the mark E Mark In UAD crear Clear B Q o an a si as E to clear the mark O O QO O SS 1 Adjusting clip audio level The audio meter display provides audio level adjustment for clips loaded in the player display If the clip loaded was recording using Dolby digital audio AC3 the audio gain adjustments are disabled To adjust audio level 1 In Player mode click the Meterbar button 2 Adjust the audio level in one of the following ways e Adjust the graphical faders individually or ganged which insures both channels use the same gain e Click Unity to set audio back to the last saved level 00 00 01 22 Gang Unity Save cem lt 0 4 3 Click Save to save changes to the clip audio level NOTE Saved audio levels are used every time the clip is loaded and played Unsaved changes are lost when the clip is ejected 4 Click the Meterbar button 4 again to return to Player mode Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing a clip Changing the clip thumbnail image The clip thumbnail is displayed in AppCenter for visual identification of the clip By default the 16th frame is used to generate the thumbnail image To change the clip thumbnail 1 While monitoring the play channel output use the front panel or onscreen transport controls to position the clip to the desired video frame 2 In Player select the thumbnail then click Yes in the Change
194. ideo Analog Composite PAL NTSC BNC S Video PAL NTSC BNC Analog Component RGB output only Input BNC YUV Output DVI I SDI SDI conforms to SMPTE 259M BNC DVI Digital Used for direct digital connections to digital DVI I Output ONLY displays Audio Analog Audio 2ch video Balanced differential analog sampled XLR 48 KHz 16 bit pcm Digital S PDIF EBU Standard IEC958 Digital audio interface BNC PCM or AC 3 Timecode LTC Ich per record channel 1 ch per play channel BNC Internal Generator Time of day or user selectable start timecode NA drop frame or non drop frame IEEE 1394A IEEE 1394A Input IEEE 1394A Available as a Record channel input 1394 for importing and recording media from a digital Connector recording device that uses DV or HDV format a DVI used for output only The connector carries both digital and component analog signals Selectable video compression data rates The Turbo iDDR records video using MPEG 2 Long GOP compression with selectable video data rate This allows you to choose the highest picture quality possible to obtain the storage capacity needed The following table shows the storage capacity estimates based on the video compression data rate selected in the Turbo iDDR NOTE Storage capacity will increase as larger disk sizes become available Selected Approximate Storage Capacity Data Rate 15Mbs 17 hours 12Mbs 21 hours 8 Mbs 30 hours 4Mbs 40 hours Turbo iDDR
195. iggers to events and sections in a playlist The GPI outputs can be used to trigger external equipment when the list plays Before you can use GPI output triggers in a list you must assign GPI outputs to the play channel using Configuration Manager Refer to Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR on page 33 NOTE If you want to play a list that was created on another play channel you must ensure that GPI triggers assigned to the play channels use the same names otherwise the GPI triggers will not occur Using identical GPI naming also allows copying and pasting sections and events between lists To trigger GPI outputs 1 Use Configuration Manager to assign GPI outputs to the current Play channel Follow instructions in Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR then return to this procedure 2 Select an event or section in the playlist then open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click on an event or section and select Properties 190 Turbo iDDR User Guide Managing playlists Section 1 Properties Section 1 Pe eh ea eee eee General Location i fdefault List_1 Trigger GPI GPI Out 2 End Start of section All Events End of section Start plus 00 00 00 00 End minus 00 00 00 00 Cancel 3 Select Trigger GPI then use the drop down list to select a GPI output NOTE If no GPI outputs are listed use Configuratio
196. ing Select the Time Dome then choose Available Storage or Record Progress Progress only See Displaying available storage space on and Available page 141 Storage 00 29 30 24 Length Select the Length control to enter the clip length then choose Ber record Recording continues until you choose stop or the specified length is reached Meterbar Button 5 Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio record level controls and signal meters Changes to the audio level are saved for the channel Gang Unity DP Es 262 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Guide to AMP Player Local Protocol mode The Local and Protocol control mode allows you to control a play channel locally as well as remotely to play clips You can select this control mode by choosing Local and Protocol control in the Options dialog box See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 The following describes the controls and indicators displayed in the Local and Protocol control mode Assignable Clip Preview Clip Name amp Clip Preview Buttons Timecode Current Bin Timecode Default buttons are shown g f f 00 00 01 26 clip clip_3 a Load i Location Ws deFault Options 3 C 00 0A 0z 06 ou 00 04 03 00 00 01 277 000001 26 ede In Dut Length OO N oe Ke Thumbnail Time Dome Mark in amp
197. ing media file transfers on page 124 Deleting an asset You can delete assets to free storage space You can safely delete a clip without harming the subclips playlists and programs created from it The media referenced by subclips playlists and programs is preserved when the clip is deleted Once the source clip is deleted subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming Deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin unless the bypass Recycle Bin option is used See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 230 You must empty the Recycle Bin to free storage space To delete an asset 1 Select the asset or assets in the Asset List 2 Select Delete using one of the following e Select Clips Delete or e Select Delete in the asset context menu or e Click the Delete button in the Clips Pane If the Delete button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in See Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 A progress dialog appears when deleting multiple assets If the selected asset is contained in the Recycle Bin it is permanently removed otherwise it is moved from its original bin into the Recycle Bin If an item of the same name is already in the Recycle Bin the new item is automatically renamed See also See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 230 NOTE Assets that are locked or in use cannot
198. interrupted playout 266 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Skipping to the preview clip during playout During playout you can skip to the preview clip e Select the Goto button in the player toolbar then choose the Skip to Preview in the pop up menu The play channel begins to play the preview clip J umping to a specific timecode The Goto Timecode dialog allows you to jump to the specific timecode in the current clip You can enter absolute timecode values based on recorded timecode or relative timecode values To jump to a specific timecode 1 Select the Goto button in the player toolbar then select the Goto Timecode menu item The Goto Timecode dialog appears Hi Goto Timecode Clear Select to clear entry Clear Back Back Space Relative Select to entera ok relative timecode ez Absolute Select to enter an ee absolute timecode Scrub bar Click and drag to cue the desired frame 2 Enter a timecode value using one of the following e To enter a relative timecode value select the or key enter timecode then select OK e To enter an absolute timecode value select the key enter timecode then select OK e Select and drag the Scrub Bar jjiiiii while monitoring play channel output then click OK to close Turbo iDDR User Guide 267 Chapter 5 Remote Control 268 Using front panel transport controls The f
199. io and video outputs when the play channel is in stop mode or when no clip is loaded This allows you to monitor the record channel inputs while recording The following table describes play channel operation depending on the E to E selection E to E Setting Play channel mode Play channel output E to E Disabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show clip Eject Show black E to E Enabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show input Eject Show input Output is black if no video input is connected to R1 DVI I output does not support E to E Turbo iDDR User Guide 23 Chapter 1 Product Introduction 24 E to E considerations When E to E mode is enabled you can connect an external reference signal which is synchronous to the video input This will eliminate artifacts on the play channel output periodic vertical shift due to routing an asynchronous signal through the iDDR However this is not required for recording the 1DDR can record asynchronous signals NOTE E to E is provided for monitoring the record channel and is not intended as a program switch Media disk space How media is stored When media is recorded or imported it is stored on the iDDR internal disk drives as a multimedia clip You can play clips individually or you can create a playlist to play several clips in sequence Playlists are saved and can be loaded again at anytime The iDDR automatically prevents media referenced b
200. ion Control Description and User Operation Player Menu Control Load Select to open the Load Clip dialog which displays the View contents of the current bin Select a clip then choose OK to load See Loading media for playout on page 149 Subclip Opens the Subclip mode which allows you to create Load subclips from the currently loaded clip A subclip is an entirely new clip that references media in another clip See Creating Subclips Subclip on page 158 Goto Goto Used to jump to a specific timecode Select Goto to open Stripe Timecode the Goto dialog then enter a timecode value or use the scrub bar to Properties go to the desired position See Jumping to a specific timecode on page 151 Auto Subclips Stripe Timecode Opens the Stripe Timecode dialog which allows E bo E you to replace the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace with time of day or a specific start timecode See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 157 Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip See Viewing clip properties on page 161 Auto Subclips The auto subclip check box changes the way that the subclip mode behaves When it is NOT checked clips have to be accepted manually When it is checked a subclip will be created as soon as the user sets a mark out See About Auto Subclip mode on page 160 E to E When E to E mode is
201. ion 1 Properties P Section 1 Location vi fdeFault List_ General Change event pauses Remove all pauses dd a pause to every event Freeze on last frame Cancel 5 Use the drop down list to choose whether to Freeze on last frame Freeze on next event Show black or Show E to E 6 Click OK Each event s properties are modified to include the specified pause type During playback each event will remain paused at its end until you intervene The pause symbol ae appears next to the events in List view To remove pause from all events in a section To remove pauses at the end of all section events 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click on a section and select Properties 3 Click All Events Turbo iDDR User Guide 189 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation MS Section 1 Properties P Section 1 Location vi fdeFaulksList_ General Change event pauses Remove all pauses dd a pause to every event Freeze on last frame 7 Cancel 4 Select the Change event pauses check box then choose the Remove all pauses option 5 Click OK Pauses are removed from all events in the section The section now plays without pausing between any events Adding GPI output triggers to playlists You can assign GPI output tr
202. ion the clip to the desired frame for mark in then click the In button b Using the transport controls position the clip to the desired frame for mark out then click the Out button Alternatively Select the mark in or mark out timecode entry controls and enter a specific timecode value Alternatively Select the Length timecode entry control and enter a clip length then create either a mark in or a mark out point 5 In Subclip view click Accept The subclip is saved and ejected then Player returns to Subclip view with a new subclip name loaded NOTE If the Accept button does not flash but instead the clip is saved and a new subclip is loaded the iDDR is in Auto subclip mode See About Auto Subclip mode on page 160 NOTE Clicking the Source Clip button or the Eject button prior to pressing the Accept button closes Subclip mode without creating a new clip Both of these buttons are used to exit Subclip mode Turbo iDDR User Guide 159 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 160 About Auto Subclip mode The Auto Subclip feature changes the way that the subclip mode behaves Auto Subclip mode eliminates the Accept step in the subclip procedure In Auto Subclip mode you simply set mark in then set mark out On setting mark out the subclip is automatically generated and ejected and anew subclip name is loaded in the Subclip display Auto Subclip mode is useful when you want to create subclips whi
203. ip length is blank The length is also blank when no clip is loaded During a crash record the length increases until recording is stopped During a fixed length record the length shows the duration at which recording will be stopped automatically During a continuous record the length shows the record buffer length In both fixes and continuous record modes the length value does not change Mark In Displays the current clip s location When no clip is loaded this control In shows the current bin The current bin can be changed from the Bin 00 00 00 00 display Mark Out Shows the timecode at the start of the clip Cue 00 00 03 241 Clip Length Shows the timecode at the current record position When recording ends 00 00 30 00 this value will be one field greater than the last playable timecode Tools and Indicators Disk Storage Indicator l Graphically represents remaining storage 60 Full 95 Full Full 0 Full Tool Buttons The Player and Recorder displays include tool buttons for controlling the channel operation l E to E oft OFF aka Turbo iDDR User Guide Recording clips Control Description and User Operation Scroll Indicator The scroll indicator appears on the right side of every display and menu The black bar represents the viewable portion of the display The white area outside the black bar indicates the portion of the display that is above or b
204. is displayed in megabytes per second and percentage of job completed All jobs waiting in the queue are shown as Pending Jobs that encountered errors are displayed along with an error code You may find a more detailed error message in the Properties page Viewing detailed transfer job properties 1 In the Transfer Monitor select a transfer job 210 Turbo iDDR User Guide E Transfer Monitor ia iy p c ne ie COUCE Receiving jg i Dest C Temp clip_2 gef Sending Completed 2 Click Properties 3 When the Transfer Job Properties dialog box appears select the Transfer page to Viewing detailed transfer job properties Vi fdetaultClip_ hare Abort Vi fdefaultClip_14 C Temp sclip_3 qxt Done Vi fdefaultClip_13 C Tempsclip_1 1 get Done examine transfer properties General properties page Transfer Job Properties x Name Clip_2 Type Clip K Location default Transfer Tracks Format compression Size Length Created Modified Locked Turbo iDDR User Guide 1 Video 2 Audio 1 Timecode NTSC Non DropFrame Dyes 1105 MBytes 00 05 22 035 05 14 03 04 31 PM 05 14 03 04 36 PM Cancel Proper 211 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Transfer properties page General Source Vi fdetaultclip_2 Destination C TempiTest5 gsf Type Send to File Status Transferring Percent 74 Current Rate 2 4Mb s Average Rate 4 6Mb s T
205. is includes but is not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not install any Windows updates these are distributed by Thomson Grass Valley 31 Chapter 1 Product Introduction 32 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Information in this chapter includes Using the configuration manager on page 34 About video scaling settings on page 36 Video output connector compatibility on page 38 Guidelines for selecting video data rate on page 38 Configuring your Turbo 1DDR on page 39 Adjusting video output timing on page 45 Turbo iDDR User Guide 33 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Using the configuration manager The Configuration Manager is the primary configuration tool for the Turbo iDDR It makes settings that apply to the overall Turbo iDDR as well as settings that apply to individual channels Configuration Manager settings are stored in a database The Turbo 1DDR s current configuration is always based on the settings saved in the database When the Turbo iDDR starts up it reads the settings from the database and configures itself accordingly When you modify a setting in Configuration Manager you must save the setting in order to update the database and reconfigure the Turbo iDDR You can also save Configuration Manager settings as configuratio
206. ition to playing single a single clip the iDDR play channels can also play lists that contain clips and programs stored on the iDDR Playlist mode is supported in both front panel and workstation operating modes however workstation operation extends the playlist features available The following table summarizes and compares the basic features supported in playlist mode for both front panel and workstation operation Basic Feature Description Availability FrontPanel Workstation Mode Mode Editing playlists Events in a playlist can be rearranged or removed YO vA and new events added between existing ones Editing eventsin Events can be renamed and trimmed Trimming v the list an event moves the mark in and mark out points This only affects the event not the source clip Event transitions Transitions between all events in a list is a cut i e a a the last frame of an event is followed by the first frame of the next event Loop ona Sections are provided within the list to provide v section flexibility during playout A section can be set up to loop indefinitely The section can be taken out of the loop by manual intervention Loop on a list Lists can be set up to loop indefinitely The list 7a 4 can be taken out of the loop by manual intervention stop or goto Pause at the end Events can pause playout at their end At event Y vA of events pauses you can choose to show black show E to E freeze on last
207. itioning products i e timebase correction Analog Component Video I O Parameter Specification Component Video Standard BetaCam Sony YPbPr SMPTE 153 EBU N10 YUV SMPTE 153 EBU N10 RGB output only Sync Signal input Input Y Sync Signal output Play channel video type e YUV 3 wire sync on Y e RGB 5 wire RGBHV Connectors Input BNC 75 ohm Output DVI I a The iDDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices i e VHS or U Matic VTRs and low cost cameras However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal conditioning products 1 e timebase correction Turbo iDDR User Guide 291 Appendix C Specifications Genlock Reference Characteristics Description Signal Type NTSC PAL Color Black Composite Analog Connectors 2 BNC 75 ohm passive loop through Color Field Detection Based on SCH Phase Correct color framing for signals having an average SCH phase 40 Lockup 10 Once locked to color field it will stay locked over a range of 0 to 90 Burst Frequency Lock Range PAL 10 Hz at subcarrier NTSC 20 Hz at subcarrier Signal Amplitude Lock Range Stays locked to 6 dB and 3 dB Input Return Loss gt 40 dB to 5 MHz Unlocked internal clock accuracy When not locked to a reference 27Mhz will be within 25PPM
208. itoring information displayed for the list The selections you make determine the list attributes that are displayed in the following locations e List information displayed in the monitor pane List information is displayed under the thumbnail in the monitor pane You can select the list attributes displayed in the monitor pane e Countdown timecode displayed in the Playlist toolbar The countdown timer can count down to the next section the next event or the end of list To select the monitor mode 1 In List view select Playlist Options Turbo iDDR User Guide 173 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation The Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Monitor tab The Monitor settings page appears E Options Monitor the following values Event name Countdown to next event Next event name Section name Countdown to next section Next sectian name List name Countdown to end of list Cancel 3 Select one of the monitor information options 4 Click OK to save settings and close the Options dialog Creating a simple playlist Lists are created using the List view When Playlist mode is started the last list loaded on the play channel is opened automatically If the last list loaded has been deleted then an empty list containing one section and no events is created New lists are named List_n where n is the first number that results in a unique file name There is no eject operation
209. l Protocols ccccccsssseseecececeeeceeceeeceeeseeeeecsecaeeeeeeesaeseeeseseaas 252 About remote control and Supported protocols ccccccseeeceeceeeeeecneeeeeeeneeees 252 Making RS 422 or Ethernet CONNECTIONS ccececeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaseaeeees 253 Remote control operation In front panel mode ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 254 Remote control operation In Workstation mode cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeees 255 Using GPI input and output triggers ccceecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeeas 269 Making GP COnneClONS s 25cc3 ai ies Acree ee 269 GOnnguring GPL INPUT MOOG S ca a o E AEE 269 Configuring GP FoUtD rTTIJJErS mera e A R 270 Using an Ethernet connection Overview Or networking sossen ta n e a TT 272 Making the Ethernet network connection c cccseecececeeeeeeseeeeesaeseeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeess 272 Configuring IDDR network settings ccccccececcseeeeceeeeeeeeeaesaaeeeecseeeeeeeeeesssaaeaaaeeess 274 Configure Windows network settings ccccccccceseceseesssseeeeeeeeeeesssaeeeaeaeeeseeeees 274 Enable streaming Adding network hosts Names eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 275 File sharing Mapping network riVeS cccsecccccsseeeeceseeeeececeeeeecaueseesaueeeesenseseeeas 276 6 Turbo iDDR User Guide Chapter 7 Maintenance Tasks Media drive maintenance eccceccccceseeecceccaeceeeceeece
210. le a source clip is playing You simply load a clip press play then create subclips by selecting In Out In Out etc To enable Auto Subclip mode e In the Player mode Control View click Player Auto Subclips Creating subclips in Cue view In Cue view you can automatically create a subclip from the selected cue point The selected cue point becomes the mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip If more than one cue point is selected a subclip is created using the first and last cue points This feature allows you to manage the media of interest as a separate clip rather than media between cue points in a clip For example once you ve made a subclip it can be added to a playlist By default subclips generated from the cue list are given names of the format lt clip name gt lt first cue name gt For example a subclip generated from a cue point named cue_1 in a clip named MyClip is named MyClip cue_1 If a clip already exists with this name you are prompted to enter a unique name To create a subclip from media between two selected cue points 1 Select two cue points in the cue point list 2 Click Player Create Clip To create a subclip using a selected cue point as mark in 1 Select the cue point to use as the mark in for the new clip 2 Click Player Create Clip The subclip is terminated by the source clip mark out point To create a subclip for all cue points
211. lected in the asset list New Event Displayed when the selected channel is in Playlist mode Event View Creates an unattached event in the playlist that can be previewed and then inserted Insert Displayed when the selected channel is in Playlist mode List View Inserts selected assets into the playlist Note Double clicking the asset in the asset list performs the same function as clicking the context button Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Right clicking a button opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 242 Search Opens the search dialog box See Locating assets on page 230 New Bin Creates a new bin To create a new bin in the current disk volume click New Bin then enter the new bin name using onscreen or external keyboard See Working with bins on page 221 Options Opens the options dialog box which allows you to modify how assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 Delete Deletes the selected item s See Deleting a bin on page 223 or Deleting an asset on page 227 Rename Opens the rename dialog box See Renaming an asset on page 224 Send to Opens the Send to dialog box used to send the asset to a file or streaming transfer
212. lecting E to E mode on page 76 Related topics e Playing a clip on page 76 e Editing a clip on page 77 Turbo iDDR User Guide 75 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Playing a clip Once an asset is loaded in the player display you can play it in regular or off speed play You can also search for a specific frame of video using the transport controls Use the links in the following table to find information on playing clips If you are using Refer to Front Panel controls Using the front panel controls on page 51 Keyboard shortcuts Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 GPI input triggers Setting GPI input triggers on page 43 Selecting loop play Loop play allows the clip to play in a continuous loop until Stop is pressed To enable loop play e To enable loop play touch Loop Off to turn it on Selecting E to E mode In E to E mode the record channel inputs are switched to the play channel audio and video outputs standard definition when the play channel is in stop mode or when no clip is loaded This allows you to monitor the record channel inputs while recording To enable E to E mode e In the player display touch E to E to turn it on The following table describes play channel operation depending on the E to E selection E to E Setting Play channel mode Play channel output E to E Disabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show cli
213. lication e The mouse and keyboard are used to control the iDDR e Front panel transport control buttons functional in AppCenter Workstation mode 1 e record play stop etc and Shuttle Jog Turbo iDDR User Guide 27 Chapter 1 Product Introduction 28 Connecting a keyboard monitor and mouse to the rear panel provides access to the AppCenter user interface You can use mouse and keyboard shortcuts to control the iDDR The mouse is only used on the AppCenter user interface not the front panel application See Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation on page 113 Front panel and AppCenter mode In this mode of operation the Turbo iDDR is actually in front panel control mode but AppCenter is still available by connecting a keyboard monitor and mouse for managing media for example moving copying transporting or deleting clips Remote control modes GPI Control GPI input triggers can be assigned to channels to control actions such as record play stop and skip a playlist event GPI output triggers can be defined for channels and inserted in playlists to control external equipment as the list is played See Setting GPI input triggers on page 43 Remote Control Device Using Serial Control Protocols Over RS 422 The iDDR can be controlled by devices and applications software developed for the Turbo iDDR that use serial control protocols over the RS 422 serial port See Using remote control protocols on p
214. lip Eject Show black E to E Enabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show input Eject Show input amp Output is black if no video input is connected to R1 DVI I output does not support E to E 150 Turbo iDDR User Guide Jumping to a specific timecode E to E considerations When E to E mode is enabled you can connect an external reference signal which is synchronous to the video input This will eliminate artifacts on the play channel output periodic vertical shift due to routing an asynchronous signal through the iDDR However this is not required for recording the iDDR can record asynchronous signals NOTE E to E is provided for monitoring the record channel and is not intended as a program switch J umping to a specific timecode The Goto dialog box allows the player mode to jump to the specific clip timecode that you enter You can enter an absolute timecode value based on recorded timecode or a relative timecode value that is cue the video to a point some value relative the current frame If you don t know the timecode value of the frame you want you can click and drag the scrub bar to shuttle to the desired frame To jump to a specific timecode 1 With a clip loaded in Player mode do one of the following e Click the Goto button e Select Player Goto The Goto Timecode dialog appears E Goto Timecode Clear Select to clear entry Clear Back Back Space Relative Select to ent
215. lowing is true e Media outside the clip marks is erased except that portion referenced by a subclip playlist event or program e All subclips and events generated from the source clip will retain 1 second of media before the mark in and after the mark out e Event in becomes the first video frame of the file Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with the Recycle Bin e Event out becomes the last video frame of the file e Clip length becomes the total file length Locking an asset Locked assets cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way To lock an asset 1 Select the asset in the Asset List 2 To view the Properties dialog box for the selected asset do one of the following e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 The Asset Properties dialog appears W Clip_12 Properties m Mame Clip_12 Type Clip Location vijfideFault Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Format HTSZ Mon DropFrame Compression MpegstdDeF Sizes ME yhes Length 00 00 00 00 Created 05 0205 05 30 PM Modified 05 02 05 05 30 PM Aspect Ratio Unknown Locked Cancel 3 Click the General tab then select the Locked check box to lock the asset 4 Click OK to close the Properties dialog Working
216. ly named custom configuration files You can load a configuration file to restore system settings To save custom settings 1 In the Configuration Manager click the Save button The Save As dialog opens 2 Use the up arrow or select folders to navigate to the folder in which you want to save the configuration file 34 Turbo iDDR User Guide Restoring default settings 3 Enter a name for the configuration file Do not name the file DefaultConfig xml as this name is reserved for the factory default configuration file Otherwise standard Windows 2000 and up file naming restrictions apply 4 Click Save and Close To restore custom settings 1 If you want to save current settings you should save them as a configuration file before continuing 2 In the Configuration Manager click the Load button The Open dialog opens 3 Use the up arrow or select folders to navigate to the custom configuration file 4 Select the custom configuration file 5 Click Open The custom settings are loaded into Configuration Manager but they are have not been saved and put into effect 6 Click OK to save and apply settings and to close the Configuration Manager Restoring default settings You can restore factory default settings as follows e You can restore some individual settings or groups of settings by selecting the Default button which appears below the settings in the configuration screen e You can restore all the
217. m you may be required to use a video reference signal to synchronize the 1DDR and other video sources This ensures a stable picture on the display device when switching between other video sources Topics here include e Using the video reference input on page 45 e Video timing principles on page 47 e To adjust video output timing on page 47 Using the video reference input The video reference signal is used to synchronize equipment in a video system so that video output signals can be combined and switched with other signal sources smoothly Without synchronization switching between signal sources will produce picture jumps and rolls while the display device re synchronizes Turbo iDDR User Guide 45 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR Display Video Switcher System Saffire iDDR beweemeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeoceeceeeseond beeweeeeseeoeeeeseeeesecoeecoosoeoesoed Video Reference Signal Generator NOTE Some seamless video switchers contain frame lock circuitry that eliminates the need to synchronize the iDDR Refer to your video switcher documentation to determine if you need to synchronize and time the iDDR The iDDR uses a composite analog video reference signal connected to the video r
218. m one of the most recent source locations visited history 5 Verify the destination directory indicated next to Bin Name This is where the imported file is placed 6 Modify the clip name if needed by selecting the Clip Name edit control 7 Click Import to start the import NOTE Import is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Monitoring media file transfers on page 207 to view the job status To import a still image file You can import still image or image sequence files When imported the image is recorded as a clip using the duration aspect ratio and resolution you specify 1 Verify the current bin location The current bin is the destination directory for the import operation For help see Changing the current bin on page 221 2 Select Clips Import The Import dialog box opens Turbo iDDR User Guide To import a still image file 3 Click File The Import dialog box appears Source Look in C imported_Clips series1 gxf 3 25 03 1 17 AM esi gxf 3 20 03 10 03 PM es gxf 3 16 03 9 44 PM File Name en 1 gxt Destination Bin Name V default Clip Name en Cancel NOTE The appearance of the asset list and file open dialog boxes is determined by the View Option setting Use the Clips Pane context menu to choose Image or Text view See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 4 In the Source section browse to locate and select the source file
219. mote control mode from either the front panel control mode or workstation control mode Topics included here e About remote control and supported protocols on page 252 e Making RS 422 or Ethernet connections on page 253 e Remote control operation In front panel mode on page 254 e Remote control operation In Workstation mode on page 255 About remote control and supported protocols The following table shows the remote control protocols supported Supported Comments Protocols AMP Advanced Media Protocol AMP AMP is an extension of the Odetics protocol BVW BVW Protocol supports standard set of commands used for VTR machine control BV W Insert Edit used by most edit control panels is not supported Refer to one of the following topics to enable remote control e Remote control operation In front panel mode on page 254 e Remote control operation In Workstation mode on page 255 About AMP protocol support You can use Advanced Media Protocol AMP to control iDDR record and play channels This protocol is an extension of the Odetics protocol External control devices can be connected via rear panel RS 422 serial connectors or an Ethernet network connection Two Head Player Model The AMP protocol supports the use of a two head player model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Current clip The AMP preset id is considered the current
220. n Manager to assign GPI outputs to the current channel then return to this step Refer to Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR on page 33 4 Select the trigger action for the GPI output Action Trigger point Start of event or section First frame of event or section End of event or section Last frame of event or section Start plus Start of event or section plus the time you enter Offset should not exceed the event or section total length End minus End of event or section minus the time you enter Offset should not exceed the event or section total length If the offset time entered exceeds the event or section length a warning message is displayed 5 Click OK to save settings Managing playlists Managing lists includes the following tasks e Saving acopy of a playlist on page 192 e Renaming a playlist on page 192 e Changing the playlist thumbnail image on page 192 e Locking a playlist on page 193 Turbo iDDR User Guide 191 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 192 e Setting the playlist timecode on page 193 e Locating a playlist in the clips pane on page 194 e Viewing playlist properties on page 194 Saving a copy of a playlist When you are creating a new playlist you might find it easier to use an existing similar playlist as your starting point rather than creating a list from scratch To do this you must first save a copy of the pla
221. n asset management tasks To Do this Rename assets 1 Use the control knob to highlight the asset in the Clips pane Press MENU f then use the control knob to choose Rename Use the control knob or external keyboard to rename the asset oe E Select Done in the onscreen keyboard or press Enter on the external keyboard Delete assets You can safely delete a clip without harming the subclips playlists and programs created from it The media referenced by subclips playlists and programs is preserved when the clip is deleted Once the source clip is deleted subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming 1 Use the control knob to highlight the asset in the Clips pane 2 Press Menu f then use the control knob to choose Delete NOTE Deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin unless the bypass Recycle Bin option is used You must empty the Recycle Bin to free storage space Copy or Move assets 1 Use the control knob to highlight the asset in the Clips pane 2 Press MENU Z then use the control knob to choose Copy To or Move To 3 Select the destination location from the menu NOTE To copy or move multiple assets press Menu then choose Select All or Multiple Selection Multiple Selection operates the same as CTRL click on an external keyboard See Select multiple assets in a bin on page 107 Lock ass
222. n files Configuration files are generated by the Configuration Manager application as stand alone XML files You can save settings out of Configuration Manager into a configuration file Likewise you can load settings into Configuration Manager from a configuration file However you must use Configuration Manager as the means to save the settings to the database before the settings actually take effect Configuration files are not linked directly to the database You can use configuration files as a means to back up your settings You can also use configuration files to save several different groups of customized settings each with a unique name so that you can quickly load settings for specialized applications Refer to Saving and restoring your settings on page 34 Accessing Turbo iDDR configuration You can configure your system using either the front panel or the AppCenter Workstation The front panel uses the Tools menu to access iDDR configuration settings The AppCenter Workstation uses the Configuration Manager To access the configuration settings e In front panel mode press Menu fa then choose Tools using the control knob Or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration NOTE If the Turbo iDDR is in Workstation mode refer to Enabling front panel control mode on page 50 Saving and restoring your settings Settings can be saved as a configuration file You can save any number of unique
223. n page 111 R1 00 00 03 27 00 00 27 09 MII Clip_13 Loop Record Fixed Length 00 00 30 00 We ideFaulk In 00 00 00 00 ue 00 00 03 21 New Clip IEEE 1394 Status Bar S a sa ale Status Messages Status icon icon Name Description Protocol Monitor This icon appears when a channel is configured for remote control using D a remote control protocol application The Protocol Monitor icon flashes when any protocol is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Transfer Monitor Appears during a file transfer or import export operation Status Always appears on the StatusBar however the button symbol changes BO depending on the system status See Interpreting the Status Icon on page 111 Types of messages displayed in the Status Bar In normal operation the message area displays status messages for the selected channel however if a problem develops with the system software or a hardware subsystem the Status Bar flashes and an error message is displayed for approximately 110 Turbo iDDR User Guide Interpreting the Status Icon 5 seconds Afterward the display returns to the channel status message and the error message is written to the status log file The following table gives examples of the types of messages displayed in the Status bars Message Type Example Messages Channel Status Player 1 Clip 7 cued Message Recorder 1 Clip 13
224. n the Options dialog box See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 Channel status information displayed includes current clip timecode current clip name countdown to the preview clip and preview clip name The following describes the indicators displayed Protocol control only mode Assignable Clip PB or EE Clip Name amp Countdown Buttons Timecode Mode Current Bin Timecode Default buttons Indicates the are shown selected mode P1 0000 09 20 VA TRE l Clip Clip_4 ay Hew Clip B Location w default Options PE In Out Length 0000 07 06 00 00 18 033 OO 00 10 2F _ Cl a ESD SKS coe zee OO 00 08 11 aap Thumbnail Time Dome Current and Preview clips Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignment to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Button choices include Options or Properties The buttons function the same as the context menu items Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode of the clip The TIRED timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 157 EE or Playback Selection The text displayed to the ri
225. nd User Operation List Timecode 07 07 25 176 Though each play event contains the timecode information from its source clip the timecode for the list is generated internally This timecode can be an offset from a specific timecode the default is 01 00 00 00 See Setting the playlist timecode on page 193 Section Text View a Section 1 Section Thumbnail View EI Section 1 A list has as least one section but can have up to 100 All events belong to a section and each section can have up to 1000 events In Thumbnail View the section is displayed as a Time Dome which shows the amount of the section that has played An empty Time Dome indicates the section has not started to play Sections can be expanded or collapsed to reveal or hide the events that belong to the section Expanded sections are indicated by a symbol Countdown Timecode 00 00 03 12 Displays the time to the next event section or end of the list To select the countdown mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting Options in the Playlist menu View tabs These tabs toggle between List View and Events view Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the buttons located in the Playlist toolbar to best suit your workflow Right clicking a button opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using Pl
226. nd a mark out point which refer to the first and last frames displayed when the clip is played When first recorded clip marks are set to the beginning and end of available media You can edit the clip marks in order to reference only the desired media When clip marks are moved the unused media is not deleted Clearing the marks resets the them to the first and last frames of the recorded clip See also Clearing mark in mark out points on page 156 The following restrictions apply when editing clip marks e Mark in must precede the mark out e Marks cannot be set outside the recorded media e Marks cannot be changed on a clip that is still being recorded 154 Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing a clip NOTE If more media exists after the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed beneath the In Out timecode To permanently remove media outside the marks refer to Erasing a clip s unused media on page 228 NOTE If more media exists after the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed beneath the In Out timecode To permanently remove media outside the marks refer to Erasing a clip s unused media on page 228 To move clip marks load the clip in player then use one of the following methods e Moving clip marks Using the In Out buttons on page 155 e Moving clip marks Using the timecode entry controls on page 155 e Moving clip marks Using the clip length control
227. nel pane Only the monitor pane and the clips pane are displayed hoplenter Workstation Pisin use Fie Edit View Clipe Help 10 17 57 05 i Clip_9 j k of iz ak _id lp i Clip_12 ma j 15 19 20 01 Clip Pi in use F i i Tia ki a we ER he i clip i5 i 7 lp 16 clie E w Clip_20 Clip_21 fa 01 39 25 01 clip _ amp While the Turbo is in front panel control mode each channel s monitor pane displays In Use When the channel is selected its mode is displayed as Front Panel In front panel control mode you can use AppCenter to do the following e Monitor channels using the monitor pane e Manage media using the clips pane This includes all file management tasks and importing exporting and transferring media e Monitor Turbo system status using the Status Bar Turbo iDDR User Guide 115 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Using AppCenter in workstation control mode Workstation control mode enables opens the AppCenter channel pane and disables front panel touch screen control FN Local P1 AppCenter Workstation File Edit View Player Clips Help 00 01 22 11 int j a In Out Length rar paea wa 00 00 00 00 00 01 22 00 00 01 22 038 1P 16 15 00 16 lt lt E gt Le 00 00 09 20 re Clip Clip 4 R Location CHONGC In Out Length 00 00 09 16 Clip_4 90 00 07 06 90 00 18 03 00 00 10 27 00 00 08 11 aa gt gt gt Pl
228. ng CIID DIODES soins eet cele oe cen eo a eee aN 69 le lor Fale h lt e resna s metres ie ence mnt ertset one ence Oe nnEn ere Eran ence eres 69 Playing and editing Clips 224 5 c2cisco ate esse ee ence e ea iaaa 70 PD OUI Olay NG CHD S oacmssctcce sc oxece tee eres ts e aa a eanais 71 Guide to using front panel Player display ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseanaeeeees 72 Features in the player context MENU cccecccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeees 74 Loading media for playOuls 22 seis eo veces dances hexane 75 FAY UMC 1G MO as cetera re a a a a ee eecenna ete 76 SEIECHING loop PAV eea ep assh 20d a heen ee eaenaes 76 SECUN ETO IMO S airs che ead sire cae erace cece a ESE 76 JUMPING tO a SPECIFIC timecode ceseeeeccccecceseeeeecceeeeneceeseeaeseeeeeeeseaaeeesesenas 77 EdIUNO f Ie ee eaeey eee eat racine a ener een een ee eee ee eee ee 77 SHE ATING SUDGCINDS menaa a A a 80 Locating the clip loaded in player 00 ceesecccccseceeseeeeeeceesseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeesseseesseseaas 82 Viewing clip properties 2csc2s xeccscescsecccsacseeteciet eaiveMecimnuiensinad asin cheeks 82 Playing Playliste csend e a 83 Introducing Playlist Mode eiea a a a 84 Before using Playlist mode ccccccssssseeeeeceeceeseceeeeceeesseeceeesaeaeaeeeeeeseageeesseneaas 85 Guide to using the Edit List display cccccccccsessssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeneaeas 88 Creating a Sinple playliS te
229. ng playlist properties The playlist properties dialog box includes features that controlling list playback in the Playlist mode Refer to To repeat or pause at the end of a section on page 186 to learn about using the playlist properties dialog box Turbo iDDR User Guide 243 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Viewing program properties 1 Select the program in the Clips Pane asset list 2 Open the Program Properties dialog box using one of the following methods e Select Clips Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Click the Properties button in the Clips Pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 Program_1 Properties amp m fame Program _i Type Program Location default Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 Format NTSC DropFrame Compression Mpeg Length 00 04 27 27 Created 12 03 03 11 32 4M Modified 12 03 03 11 43 AM The Program Properties dialog box is displayed which has two pages General and Data The General page is self explanatory The Data page is used to add metadata to the program To learn more refer to Working with asset metadata on page 238 Viewing bin properties 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin label then select Organize Bins J default organize Bins default Recycle Bin m y bir Search v clip
230. nning of the name The renamed asset is not re sorted NOTE Assets that are locked or in use cannot be renamed Selecting multiple assets You can select multiple assets in the Clips Pane as follows e Select Clips Select All e Using mouse and keyboard hold the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard while selecting multiple assets with the mouse or arrow keys Moving an asset to another bin There are two ways to move an asset to another bin Using Cut Paste or the Send To dialog box Using the cut and paste commands 1 Select the asset s in the asset list 2 Cut the asset to the clipboard using one of the following e Select Cutin the asset context menu or e Select Edit in the AppCenter toolbar then choose Cut e Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl X 3 Change the current bin to the target bin Refer to Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 221 4 Paste the asset s from the clipboard to the current bin The Paste operation is accessed in the same way as Cut NOTE If an asset is locked or in use it remains in the existing bin while the remaining assets are moved to a new bin with the specified name 224 Turbo iDDR User Guide Working with assets Using Send To 1 Select the asset s in the Asset List 2 To open the Send To dialog box using do one of following e Select Clips Send To or e Select Send To in the asset context menu or e Click the Send To button in the Clips Pane
231. ntil the fixed length is reached Then the thumbnail will update every 3 minutes as media is erased beginning with the oldest unused media As the media used to generate thumbnails is erased new thumbnails are generated Erasing oldest media is suspended when creating a subclip When creating subclips in Player mode erasing oldest media is suspended when the first mark 1s entered mark in or mark out This means that the loop record program length may grow larger than the length specified Erasing media is resumed and the oldest media outside the fixed length is purged when the second mark is entered and you select the Accept button You could inadvertently fill storage space if you enter the subclip marks but fail to click the Accept button NOTE Erasing oldest media is also resumed when you exit subclip mode by ejecting the subclip or by clicking the Source Clip button Use genlocked inputs for time delay For error free time delay operation ensure that the video input is genlocked to the video reference signal This will eliminate Turbo iDDR User Guide About loop record mode periodic picture shift Turbo iDDR User Guide 127 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Guide to using Recorder mode The following describes the basic controls in the Recorder mode Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Default buttons Click clip name to rename clip 0
232. ntrol protocol commands Clicking on the Protocol Monitor button opens the Protocol Monitor dialog box which shows the specific channel s receiving messages See Monitoring remote control communications on page 268 Transfer Monitor Appears during a file transfer or import export operation Selecting the button opens the Transfer monitor pane See Monitoring media file transfers on page 207 ae StatusPane Always appears on the StatusBar however the button symbol changes depending on the system status Interpreting StatusPane button icons on page 246 Interpreting StatusPane button icons The StatusPane button always appears in the StatusBar The button icon changes depending on the status of the trap messages Selecting the StatusPane button opens the StatusPane which is used to view and manage status messages logged on the system Icon Name Description ar Default All warnings and alert messages have been cleared A Warning There is at least one warning message and no alert messages O Alert There is at least one uncleared alert message 246 Turbo iDDR User Guide Message types displayed in the StatusBar Message types displayed in the StatusBar The following table describes the message types that appear in the StatusBar Typically the StatusBar message area displays status messages for the selected channel however if a problem develops with the software application or a hardw
233. ny cue point in the list Working with clips that are still recording The following restrictions apply when working with a clip in Player mode that is currently recording e You cannot rename the clip e The clip mark in mark out points cannot be modified e Subclips created from a clip currently being recorded can only have a Mark Out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a clip longer than has been recorded under the assumption that the unrecorded frames will fill it in Otherwise clips that are currently being recorded behave normally As a reminder Read Only is displayed in the StatusBar when the clip loaded or playing is still being recorded Playing a playlist saved as a program Playlists cannot be loaded and played in Player mode They must be played in Playlist mode However you can save a playlist as a program and then play it in Player mode A program includes all the media and transitions in the playlist but does not include any event that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause When a program is loaded in Player mode it is handled in the same way as a simple clip as far as Player mode is concerned For more information on creating programs refer to Saving a list as a program on page 195 Selecting Player mode in AppCenter Player mode requires a single play channel If the play channel is currently being used in another mode you can use the
234. nytime the LTC signal disappears Clips with missing or intermittent timecode will show this behavior during playback in a play channel If LTC is intermittent or missing try one of the following solutions e Use the internal timecode generator as the timecode source for recording See Changing the timecode source on page 138 e Stripe the timecode after the clip is recorded using the Player application See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 66 Using the video input noise reduction filter The video input noise reduction filter provides pre filtering to enhance the picture quality Re recording and appending clips is not supported through the user interface You cannot record over a previously recorded clip To replace the unwanted clip delete it and record a new one Also appending previously recorded clips is not supported that is once the recording is stopped you cannot start the recording again using the same clip If a clip is currently loaded when record is selected the clip is ejected and a new clip is created before recording begins NOTE Appending previously recorded clips is supported through AMP Serial Control Protocol Contact Thomson Grass Valley for more information on control devices available Pre roll time Recording begins as soon as record is selected About loop record mode Loop record allows you to specify a fixed length recording that records continuously When the
235. o at the current position is erased As this happens the current position is advanced in 3 minute increments as the oldest unused media is erased e Changing thumbnail image Thumbnail images displayed in the clips pane are generated using the 16th frame of video The thumbnail image for a loop record program appears as normal until the fixed length is reached Then the thumbnail will update every 3 minutes as media is erased beginning with the oldest unused media As the media used to generate thumbnails is erased new thumbnails are generated e Erasing oldest media is suspended when creating a subclip When creating subclips in Player mode erasing oldest media is suspended when the first mark is entered mark in or mark out This means that the loop record program length may grow larger than the length specified Erasing media is resumed and the oldest media outside the fixed length is purged when the second mark is entered and you select the Accept button You could inadvertently fill storage space if you enter the subclip marks but fail to click the Accept button NOTE Erasing oldest media is also resumed when you exit subclip mode by ejecting the subclip or by clicking the Source Clip button e Use genlocked inputs for time delay For error free time delay operation ensure that the video input is genlocked to the video reference signal See Using the video reference input on page 45 This will eliminate periodic picture shift
236. o be up converted then the list asset will be shown with the up conversion icon Appears when the clip s aspect ratio does not match the play channel video output type This icon indicates that the clip is going to be down converted Note that the same clip may have different conversion icons with different play channels The conversion icon follows the active channel When the recorder is active then the conversion icon 1s determined by P1 s video output format NOTE If a list contains at least one event that needs to be up converted then the list asset will be shown with the up conversion icon Working with bins Working with bins A bin is the container used to organize assets on the disk drives similar to a directory or folder on a computer The iDDR does not support nested bins that is a bin cannot contain another bin Topics here include e Changing the current bin on page 105 e Creating a new bin on page 105 e Renaming a bin on page 106 e Deleting a bin on page 106 Changing the current bin 1 To open the Bins display do one of the following e Press CLIPS twice or e Press CLIPS P then press MENU So and choose Organize Bins Beauty Shoe default Recycle Bin Player 1 Clip cued 2 Use the control knob to highlight a bin then push in the knob to select The Clips display is shown and displays the contents of the selected bin Creating a new bin 1
237. o lock the front panel press the MENU button then use the control knob to scroll and select Tools then select Lock Out Panel e To unlock the front panel press the front panel ESC SHIFT and the MENU buttons then uncheck Panel Locked 50 Turbo iDDR User Guide Using the front panel controls Using the front panel controls The front panel consists of four main components the display controls display and touch screen the edit controls and the transport controls including the control knob NOTE The front panel transport controls i e play record stop etc are also used to control the iDDR in Workstation mode Display Display amp J og Shuttle Controls Touchscreen Controls Variable Speed Play Control R1 00 00 03 21 00 00 27 09 Ml Loop Record Fixed Length 3 te Ghee Ip 00 00 30 00 VifdeFault In yi 00 00 00 00 Out IEEE 1394 7 00 00 03 211 On Audio Control Knob Edit Controls Transport Control The following table describes the front panel controls Used to display and operate the front panel mode graphical user interface TFT display and touch screen NOTE In AppCenter Workstation mode the front panel display is only used to monitor iDDR status Record Hold down PLAY then press REC b Of NOTE Can be configured for pressing Record only Stop Press STOP to stop Record Play Play Press PLAY to start play
238. of day based timecode This item is disabled for lists Prompts Turns on off prompts for trim and sub clip operations Remote Opens the Remote control that lets you select the BVW or AMP control protocols Control Tools Opens the tools dialog Turbo iDDR User Guide Loading media for playout Loading media for playout You can load clips or programs in the play display for playout To load media using the Clips display 1 Press or to select a play channel 2 Press CLIPS to open the Clips display Clip 7 cli ip Clip_10 L Clip_8 J 00 00 05 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 30 00 00 29 30 00 Kids i Halloween 2 f Halloween 3 000S 30 00 o1 29 00 00 0004 05 09 00 05 30 00 Player 1 Clip cued 3 Rotate the control knob to highlight an asset then push on the knob to load in the player display The asset thumbnail and properties appear in the clip monitor To load a clip that is still recording 1 Start the recording as described in To record a clip on page 65 2 Press a play channel button or 3 Press MENU f then scroll and select Now Recording using the control knob The clip thumbnail and properties appear in the clip monitor Since the clip is still recording the mark out point is updated periodically NOTE If play channel E to E mode is enabled play channel standard definition outputs are switched to the record channel input until playout is started Refer to Se
239. og box Turbo iDDR User Guide 193 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation MS List 7 Properties 5 E h Hame List 7 Type List General Location Wi ydefault Data Start timecode at 01 00 00 000 Drop frame 3 Select Drop Frame The drop frame option is available when system timing is set to 525 line standard Drop frame allows the playlist timecode to indicate the actual running time of the list 4 Specify a start time then click OK The start timecode is displayed in the List view toolbar Locating a playlist in the clips pane e In List view select Playlist Locate The bin containing the list is shown in the clips pane Viewing playlist properties In List view select the playlist then open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click on a playlist and select Properties 194 Turbo iDDR User Guide Saving a list as a program MS List 7 Properties a J List_7 List eee Location Vi jfdefault Tracks video 1 Audio 403 TZ 1 Format HTSC Timecode Compression MpegstdDeF Length 00 01 02 27 End Sections 1 Ewents 7 Created OS 02 2005 11 34 AM Modified 0502 2005 03 14 PM Locked Cancel Refer to the following for more information on these properties pages e Data Page see Working with asset metadata on page 238 e Timecode Page see Setting th
240. oid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Do Not Operate Without Covers To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do Not operate in Wet Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Avoid Exposed Circuitry To avoid injury remove jewelry such as rings watches and other metallic objects Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified Provide Proper Ventilation To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation Turbo iDDR User Guide Safety Summaries Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Battery Replacement To avoid damage replace only with the same or equivalent type Dispose of used battery according to the circuit board manufacturer s instructions Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual
241. ollowing describes how to control playout using the transport controls on the optional front panel The control application must be configured to allow local control See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 Front Panel Buttons Action Play Play Stop Stop Rew Previous Frame FF Next Frame Rew hold Rewind until released FF hold Fast forward until released Stop Rew Cue previous clip in a list or cue to start This stops playout Stop FF Cue next clip in a list or cue end This stops playout Stop Rew hold Cue previous clip in a list or cue to start This stops playout Stop FF hold Skip to the start of the preview clip This stops playout Stop lt Select gt Cue the selected clip Play Rew Play previous clip in a list or cue to start and begin playing Play FF Play next event in a list or cue to end Play Rew hold Play previous clip in a list or cue to start and begin playing Play FF hold Skip to and play the preview clip Play lt Select gt Play the selected clip Monitoring remote control communications The Protocol Monitor button is displayed in the AppCenter StatusBar when a protocol application is running on aniDDR channel The button flashes when any channel is receiving remote control messages Clicking the button opens the Protocol Monitor dialog box which you can use to determine
242. olution ki will be up converted to play out a video output set for a 10801 ee E n Down conversion Appears when the event s resolution does not match the play channel video output type This icon indicates that the event is going to be down converted For example a source with a 10801 resolution will be down converted to play out a video output set for a XVGA Creating a simple playlist A new list contains no events unless a clip is loaded when you enter the Edit List display As you start inserting events they will be played in the order you insert them 1 Press a play channel button or 2 Press Edit List in the player display If a clip was already loaded in the play channel it appears as a single clip in the list ite 3 Press CLIPS to open the Clips display 4 Perform one of the following steps to insert media e Double touch a clip in the Clips display or e Rotate the control knob to highlight a clip then push in the knob 5 When the playlist is complete press ESC to close the Clips display NOTE You can insert new events between existing ones by using the control knob to move the insertion point The insertion point is immediately after the selected event 6 Save the playlist using the following steps a Press MENU f then choose Save List using the control knob b Name the list using the onscreen keypad and control knob or use an external keyboard c Touch Done in the onscreen k
243. om the specified starting value to the starting value plus the length of the clip Drop frame The drop frame option is available when system timing is set to 525 line standard Drop frame allows the timecode track to indicate the actual running time of the clip Renaming a Clip in player mode 1 In the Control view select the clip name control Clip Clip_1 2 Enter the new clip name 3 Click OK or press Enter Creating Subclips A subclip is a clip created by referencing a portion of media from another clip For example if you recorded a two hour clip you could create several short subclips to use as previews or advertisements Each subclip refers to a small portion of the original clip and is listed along with all other clips in the clips pane When working with subclips the original clip is sometimes called the source clip After creating subclips you can delete the source clip Subclips created from a clip that is still recording can only have a mark out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a subclip longer than what has been recorded with the assumption the media will fill in You can create subclips from a clip being recorded in loop record mode In loop record mode media referenced by the subclips is retained while unreferenced media is discarded You can load subclips in the Control view and edit the mark in mark out points the same as aclip provided the un
244. on select the timecode entry control and enter a start timecode value The new timecode track will contain continuous values ranging from the specified starting value to the starting value plus the length of the clip Drop frame The drop frame option is available when system timing is set to 525 line standard Drop frame allows the timecode track to indicate the actual running time of the clip Turbo iDDR User Guide 79 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 80 Renaming a Clip in player mode 1 Press Menu oh then use the control knob to choose Rename 2 Enter a new name using the onscreen keypad and control knob or an external keyboard 3 Touch Done in the onscreen keyboard or press Enter on the external keyboard Creating Subclips A subclip is a clip created by referencing a portion of media from another clip For example if you recorded a two hour clip you could create several short subclips to use as previews or advertisements Each subclip refers to a small portion of the original clip and is listed along with all other clips in the clips pane When working with subclips the original clip is sometimes called the source clip After creating subclips you can delete the source clip Subclips created from a clip that is still recording can only have a mark out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a subclip longer than what has been recorded with the assumpti
245. on the knob to move the lifted event to the new location Removing events from a playlist e Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist then press MENU oh and choose Remove Adjusting event audio levels The audio meter display provides audio level adjustment for the selected in the player display If the clip loaded was recording using AC 3 digital audio the audio gain adjustments are disabled To adjust audio level 1 Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist 2 Press ESC SHIFT then choose Audio Selected Channel P1 00 26 00 0574 00 00 04 28 i 4 0 5 0 Restore Clip_ Unity 0000 05 00 lofi In 00 00 00 00 uk 00 00 05 00 Player 1 Clip_ cued 3 Do one of the following e Use the touch screen or control knob to adjust graphical faders Only the selected faders are adjusted Pushing on the knob cycles selection between both left or right channels Or e Touch Restore Unity G to return the audio to the recorded level 4 Touch Save Levels to save the audio level changes for the clip Saved audio levels are used every time the playlist is played Unsaved changes are lost when the playlist is ejected 5 Press the ESC SHIFT button to return to the player display Turbo iDDR User Guide 95 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Adding GPI output triggers to playlists You can assign GPI output triggers to events in a playlist The GPI outpu
246. on Operating Mechanical Shock Class 5 30G Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Random Vibration Operational Class 6 Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Non Operational Class 5 Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Transportation Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Equipment Type Information Technology Equipment Class Class 1 Installation Category Category II Local level mains appliances portable equipment etc Pollution Degree Level 2 operating environment indoor use only Turbo iDDR User Guide Mechanical specifications Mechanical specifications Dimension Measurement Height 5 20 in 132mm Width 16 75 in 426mm Depth 20 27 in 515mm 18 60 in 472 mm From rack mounting ears to BNCs Weight 27 75 12 6 kg Electrical specifications The following sections describe the electrical specifications Serial Digital Video SDI Composite Analog I O S Video I O Analog Component Video I O Genlock Reference System Timing S PDIF Digital Audio Analog Audio Audio headphone output with front panel option LTC Input Output RS 422 specification GPI I O specifications IEEE 1394A interface specification Turbo iDDR User Guide 289 Appendix C Specifications Serial Digital Video SDI Parameter Specification Video Standard 525 Line or 625 Line component Number o
247. on provides a graphical user interface to handle all essential tasks provided in front panel mode and more A A k O 09 Simultaneous access to common storage Simultaneous access to common storage by all three channels means that you can play a clip that is still being recorded and that a clip can be played simultaneously and independently on multiple channels Front panel operation The front panel features a TFT display with touch screen and VTR like transport controls The front panel is tilted to a convenient operating angle The user interface provides an on screen keyboard for text entry entering names and timecode You can also connect an external keyboard to the either the PS 2 or USB ports for easy text entry or transport control using keyboard shortcuts Integrated control applications software The standard control application not only enables a number of simple manual and semi automatic operations previously available with tape but also takes advantage of the capabilities of a disk based recorder e g simultaneous record play list playout clip trimming Turbo iDDR User Guide Product overview and key features Multiple signal I O formats The following table describes the signal I O formats available in the iDDR Refer to Electrical specifications on page 289 for complete specifications Signal I O format Description Connector V
248. on the media will fill in You can create subclips from a clip being recorded in loop record mode In loop record mode media referenced by the subclips is retained while unreferenced media is discarded You can load subclips in the Control view and edit the mark in mark out points the same as a clip provided the unreferenced source media has not been erased If the source media has been erased the subclip retains 1 second of media on each side of the mark in and mark out points See Moving clip mark in mark out points on page 77 To create subclips 1 Load a clip in the player 2 Press Subclip in the player display Turbo iDDR User Guide Creating Subclips P1 00 26 00 05 00 00 04 25 III Subclip Name ____ Subclip Location ____ Mark Labels lt Flash until set Reset Marks Player 1 Clip c Flashes when both Clears any subclip mark in and mark out marks that have have been set Press been set to accept marks and create a new Subclip The Subclip display appears with a new subclip loaded and the front panel Mark In and Mark Out buttons are flashing indicating that no mark in or mark out point are defined The default subclip name follows the form lt source clip name gt lt number gt for example if the source clip name is PlayoffGame the subclip name is PlayoffGame 1 3 To rename the subclip press MENU p then choose Rename Use the onscreen keyboard or and ext
249. operties display appears RT AAR QA L ANANA enn TT aM General Properties Clip_13 Clip Wo ideFaulk 1 24 1T NTSC DropFrame I Compression MPEG Size 412 MBytes Length 00 30 00 00 00 4 Created oF 03 04 04 27 PM Last Modified o7 3i 04 12 47 PM I Close 2 Use the control knob to browse or close the dialog box Locating a clip You can locate the currently loaded clip by displaying the contents of the current bin in the clips pane as follows e Press MENU f then scroll and select Locate Turbo iDDR User Guide 69 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 70 The Clips display opens showing the contents of the bin where the clip is located Playing and editing clips The information in this section describes how to play and edit clips recorded on the iDDR You can play clips in a variety of ways including off speed play VAR and triggered by GPI In addition to editing existing clips the in and out points in existing clips you can create new clips using the iDDR subclip feature Information in this section includes e About playing clips on page 71 e Guide to using front panel Player display on page 72 e Features in the player context menu on page 74 e Loading media for playout on page 75 e Playing a clip on page 76 e Selecting loop play on page 76 e Selecting E to E mode on page 76 e Jumping to a specific timecode on page 77 e
250. or SHIFT then press FF oO pp Or Esc ppl Play previous event Press PLAY or SHIFT then press REW gt a Or ESC 44 Play next event Press PLAY or SHIFT then press FF gt pvr Or Esc phl Play previous section Press PLAY or SHIFT then press and HOLD REW Hold gt 22652 ESC 1444 Play next section Press PLAY or SHIFT then press and HOLD FF Hold gt P Ee poi Skip to first selected event and stop Press STOP then select an event B lt Selection gt Skip to first selected event and play Press PLAY then select an event gt lt Selection gt Turbo iDDR User Guide 53 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 54 Display Controls Show the Recorder display R1 Show the Player 1 display PI Show the Player 2 display P1 Open the menu for the current display MENU Open the Configuration menu MENU scroll to select Tools Show the Clips display CLIPS Show Bins display CLIPS cups ESC SHIFT curs Modify the next button press ESC SHIFT Edit Controls Set clip mark in to the current play position Clear mark in value ESC SHIFT Set a clip mark out to the current play position Clear m
251. or if under the direction of Grass Valley support Turbo iDDR User Guide 279 Chapter 7 Maintenance Tasks 280 Turbo iDDR User Guide Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Topics in the appendix include About keyboard operation Channel select Basic transport controls Off speed play controls Stop Mode transport controls List controls Playlist controls Turbo iDDR User Guide 281 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts About keyboard operation A keyboard can be connected and used in front panel control mode or AppCenter Workstation mode to control the Turbo iDDR The following describes the keyboard shortcuts available Keyboard shortcuts are disabled when text entry dialog boxes are open 1 f j gt E E elal V B N M lt Channel select PAE a Select Play Stop 282 Turbo iDDR User Guide Off speed play controls Off speed play controls For this action Press Play faster Shift L Repeat this key sequence to increment the play speed up to the maximum forward shuttle speed Play slower Shift J Repeat this key sequence to decrement the play speed up to the maximum reverse shuttle speed
252. or playout Loading clips from the clips pane 1 Select a play channel by clicking in the channel s monitor pane 2 Locate the clip in the clips pane If necessary change bins by clicking the current bin control and selecting from the drop down list 3 Load the clip in one of the following ways e Drag the clip from the clips pane into the play channel e Select the clip then choose the Load button in the clips pane e Double click on the clip e Select the clip then press Enter on the keyboard Loading a clip from Player mode 1 Select a play channel by clicking in the channel s monitor pane 2 Open the Load Clip dialog using one of the following e Click the Load button in Player e Select Player Load MS Load Clip Look in Wi default deFault mybin ie W Recycle Bin i j mybin i clip IPLI Clip_4 Clip 5 Clip Name Clip Cancel 3 If needed use the Look in drop down list to browse to the desired bin 4 Select a clip in the Load Clip dialog then click OK The clip is loaded in the player NOTE If play channel E to E mode is enabled play channel standard definition outputs are switched to the record channel input until playout is started Refer to Selecting E to E mode on page 150 Related topics e Playing a clip on page 150 e Using Cue points for playback on page 152
253. ord mode 1 Connect and power on the IEEE 1394 device NOTE The top rear panel 1394 port and the front panel 1394 port are electrically the same Use only one of these connectors 2 Select the record channel and then select Recorder Options The options dialog box opens Options Select a video source for recording and display Timecode SDI Component EEE 1394 Cancel 3 Select Video and choose IEEE 1394 then select OK IEEE 1394 view is displayed and the record channel input switches to the 1394 input The status bar shows Connecting to device then Connected Initially both the monitor pane and the thumbnail in the Recorder display shows a IEEE 1394 symbol Timecode from the device is also displayed in the Recorder pane If xx xx xx xx is displayed the timecode from the device is not valid Use the following step to cue the IEEE 1394 device 4 You can control the IEEE 1394 device remotely play rewind fast forward and stop in one of the following ways e Use the iDDR front panel controls transport control buttons Shuttle Jog Knob Turbo iDDR User Guide 135 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation e Use the record channel on screen transport controls in AppCenter e Use iDDR keyboard shortcuts see Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts on page 281 e Select Goto in the Recorder pane then use the Goto Timecode dialog box to cue to a specific timecode 136 Turbo iDDR User Guide
254. orkstation mode Guide to AMP Recorder Protocol Only mode The Protocol control only mode allows you to only monitor the record channel operations and view clip information All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled You can select this mode by choosing the Protocol control only option in the Options dialog box See Select the control port and control mode on page 255 The following describes the controls and indicators in the Protocol control only mode Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Default buttons Switch to local control are shown mode to modify po Clip zno clip loaded Location bocals fideFault Length Options m In 17 10 15 24 CIKELALS Thumbnail Time Dome Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons The assignable button allows you to modify the button assignment to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Button choices include Options or Properties The buttons function the same as the context menu items Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source for recording 46 27 13 29 The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed if there is no input _ timecode Timecode Source The te
255. ot displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 2 Choose Advanced search to create adn view advanced search criteria When Advanced search is used Basic search criteria is ignored Find items that match these criteria Created Before 01 27 05 length gt 00 10 00 000 Remove Advanced Cancel 3 Click Add to add new search criteria or click Remove to remove it then click OK to start the search 234 Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating assets Add Criteria x Attribute Create Date Condition Before Value 01 27 05 Cancel The following table lists the advanced search attributes along with their conditions and value choices Advanced searches can include metadata attributes Since these are user defined only their types and conditions are listed here See also Working with asset metadata on page 238 Turbo iDDR User Guide 235 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 236 Advanced Search Criteria Attributes Conditions Value Value Name Like Not Like Name N A Type Is Is Not Clip N A Program List Compression Is Is Not DV25 N A Format MPEG Video Standard Is Is Not NTSC N A PAL Create Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Modified Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Length Greater Than Length Less Than Length Between Length Equals Length 1 Len
256. ower switch Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power and remove battery if applicable before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections Certifications and Compliances Canadian Certified Power Cords Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use FCC Emission Control Turbo iDDR User Guide This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Grass Valley can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 15 Safety Summaries 16 Canadian EMC Notice of
257. p Eject Show black E to E Enabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show input Eject Show input Output is black if no video input is connected to R1 DVI I output does not support E to E E to E considerations When E to E mode is enabled you can connect an external reference signal which is synchronous to the video input This will eliminate artifacts on the play channel output periodic vertical shift due to routing an asynchronous signal through the iDDR However this is not required for recording the 1DDR can record asynchronous signals 76 Turbo iDDR User Guide Jumping to a specific timecode NOTE E to E is provided for monitoring the record channel and is not intended as a program switch J umping to a specific timecode The Goto dialog box allows the player mode to jump to the specific clip timecode that you enter You can enter an absolute timecode value based on recorded timecode or a relative timecode value that is cue the video to a point some value relative the current frame If you don t know the timecode value of the frame you want you can click and drag the scrub bar to shuttle to the desired frame To jump to a specific timecode 1 Press MENU Soh then use the control knob to choose Goto 2 Enter a timecode value using the onscreen keypad and control knob 3 Touch Done in the onscreen keypad Related topics e Loading media for playout on page 75 e Playing a clip on page 76
258. p click and enter text To change the current bin 1 e Leea y default the target location for recording clips refer to Changing the current bin on page 139 You can use the clips pane to manage and organize clips Refer to Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 128 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using Recorder mode Control Description and User Operation Time Dome This multi function indicator displays either record progress only or Progress available storage and record progress The Time Dome also indicates Only when the record channel is in Loop Record mode Ly Available storage is estimated using the amount of free disk space and a Available the video compression settings for the channel 2 Storage The record progress indicator makes one revolution every 10 seconds in normal record or one revolution during a fixed length recording Se ae To change the Time Dome function right click the Time Dome then i Storage and choose a mode from the pop up menu Continuous oo 29 30 24 Record Mode QO Length Select the Length control to enter the clip length then choose record Recording continues until you choose stop or the specified length is reached See Using Fixed Length record mode on page 132 Meterbar Button Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio record level controls q and signal meters Changes to the audio level are saved for the channel ANAAN AA AN 00
259. p then push in on the knob to load the clip e Select the clip then choose the Load button in the Clips pane e Double click on an clip e Select a clip then press Enter on an external keyboard The clip is loaded as the current clip and the thumbnail appears Turbo iDDR User Guide 265 Chapter 5 Remote Control 00 00 02 06 re 00 00 07 526 r clip Clip_3 a Location gw 9776f40e u fdeFault amp In Out Length 00 00 02 06 00 00 04 03 oo 00 01 27 OOOO 01 26 aoe CED gt gt ae pp NOTE You can load a preview clip only if the Current preset clip is loaded 5 Load the preview as described in the previous step 4 The preview thumbnail appears behind the current clip thumbnail You can click the thumbnail image to bring the preview image to the foreground without effecting current clip playout 00 00 02 06 pe 00 00 07 26 s clip Clip_3 a j Location gw 9776f40e i fdeFault B In Out Length 00 00 02 06 00 00 04 03 Ooo 00 01 27 OO 0001 26 aoe E gt D gt ae ppm 6 Start current clip playout using your remote control device or software When the current clip playout reaches its mark out point it is ejected and the preview clip is promoted to current clip and begins to play NOTE You can toggle between current and preview clip thumbnails at anytime to identify the preview clip without affecting current clip playout 7 Load a new preview clip see step 5 to continue un
260. peed play VAR and triggered by GPI In addition to editing existing clips the in and out points in existing clips you can create new clips using the iDDR subclip feature Information in this section includes e About playing clips on page 143 e Selecting Player mode in AppCenter on page 143 e Guide to using Workstation Player Control View on page 144 e Guide to using Workstation Player Cue View on page 147 e Loading media for playout on page 149 e Playing a clip on page 150 e Selecting loop play on page 150 e Selecting E to E mode on page 150 e Jumping to a specific timecode on page 151 Turbo iDDR User Guide 141 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation e Using Cue points for playback on page 152 e Editing a clip on page 154 e Creating Subclips on page 158 e Locating the clip loaded in player on page 161 e Viewing clip properties on page 161 142 Turbo iDDR User Guide About playing clips About playing clips The AppCenter Workstation Player mode allows you to play media stored on the IDDR including clips and programs The Player mode requires a single play channel Player mode has two views Control View and Cue View The Control View allows you to play clips trim clips and create new subclips The Cue View is used to add cue points within a clip After adding cue points you can use the cue list to start playback from a
261. pter 7 Maintenance Tasks Contains step by step procedures for performing routine maintenance on the Turbo iDDR to keep it running at peak performance Turbo iDDR User Guide Finding Information Getting more information In addition to this document information is available in the following locations Turbo Documentation CD ROM A full set of support documentation is available on the Documentation CD ROM that you received with your Turbo iDDR which includes eTurbo iDDR Quick Start Guide This guide provides step by step installation instructions for basic installation and operation including recording and playing clips trimming clips and making a playlist Turbo iDDR User Manual Describes the Turbo iDDR and provides instructions for installing configuring and operating the product in either the front panel or AppCenter Workstation control modes e Turbo iDDR Service and Troubleshooing Guide Contains information for solving common setup problems as well as information on servicing and maintenance e Turbo iDDR Release Notes Contains the latest information about the Turbo iDDR software shipped on your system The information in this document includes software upgrade instructions software specifications and requirements feature changes from the previous releases and any known problems On line Help System You can access the on line help through the AppCenter Workstation user interface which
262. ptions dialog box Options Sort by Order Name Ascending Length Descending Create Date Modified Date Cancel 3 Choose the desired sorting attribute and order then click OK The Asset List sorts in the order specified NOTE When assets are added or renamed assets may not remain listed according to the selected sort order To re sort the assets repeat this procedure or press F5 to refresh the Asset List Using Basic search The Search dialog box provides the basic search mode for locating assets anywhere in the iDDR media storage Turbo iDDR User Guide 231 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 232 1 Open the Search dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Clips Search or e Click the Search button in the Clips Pane If the Search button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 2 Choose Basic search then specify search criteria on the Text Date and Type tabs The search is performed using the combination of search criteria on all three tabs Search by text If you know all or part of an asset name use the Text tab Select the text entry control then type all or part of the asset name in the Enter Search Text dialog box The default text search mode is any word or word portion For example if you enter the word fire search will find all asset names that contain fire for example fire
263. r Guide 113 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 114 Introducing AppC enter AppCenter is the built in video disk recorder application that provides a single interface for tasks such as channel control configuration clip management media transfers channel monitoring and system monitoring You can access AppCenter by connecting a VGA monitor mouse and keyboard to the Turbo iDDR Topics in this section include Starting AppCenter on page 115 Using AppCenter in front panel control mode on page 115 Using AppCenter in workstation control mode on page 116 Enabling the workstation control mode on page 116 Shutting down AppCenter and Windows on page 116 AppCenter user interface overview on page 118 Channel modes in AppCenter on page 120 Tools in AppCenter on page 121 Conventions used in the AppCenter interface on page 122 Terms and concepts used in AppCenter on page 123 Selecting the channel mode on page 124 Using on screen transport controls on page 124 Turbo iDDR User Guide Starting AppCenter Starting AppCenter At power up the Windows operating system starts On the Windows desktop open the AppCenter shortcut to start AppCenter Using AppC enter in front panel control mode At first power up the Turbo 1DDR is in front panel control mode by default This mode enables front panel control and disables closes the AppCenter chan
264. r Monitor to verify that the clip transfer rate is higher than the clip data rate This is required to prevent playback problems due to insufficient bandwidth To import a video file When you import media from a file the media is converted and stored using the 1DDR native file format 1 Verify the current bin The current bin is the destination directory for the import operation For help see Changing the current bin on page 140 2 In the AppCenter Workstation main menu select Clips Import The Import dialog box opens Turbo iDDR User Guide 197 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 198 Source Look in C imported_Clips series1 gxf 3 25 03 1 17 AM esi gxf 3 20 03 10 03 PM es gxf 3 16 03 9 44 PM File Name en 1 gxt Destination Bin Name V default Cin Name fe o o oo Cancel 3 Click File NOTE The appearance of the asset list and file open dialog boxes is determined by the Options setting See Modifying the asset list view on page 138 4 In the Source section browse to locate and select the source file The Look in label shows the current location The list under the Look in label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list such as a machine disk drive or folder to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Look in drop down list allows you to choose fro
265. r at a time Additional transfer requests are queued To enhance transfer performance you may try limiting transfers to one at a time e Adding Removing USB devices The USB connectors on the rear panel and front panel can be used to connect a mouse keyboard USB drive or other USB device Do not plug or unplug these devices while the iDDR is being used for critical play to air activity e Maximum file sizes when exporting assets to USB drives Exporting assets with long durations may result in file sizes that exceed 4GB Some USB drives are formatted using FAT FAT32 which has the 4GB maximum file size limitation Attempting to send a file to these disk volumes will cause the transfer operation to fail Disk volumes formatted using NTFS allow larger maximum file sizes Before exporting an asset be sure to check that the file size is less than 4GB otherwise ensure that the file system on the target drive supports larger files sizes To export media 1 Select the file event or clip to export 2 Press CLIPS 3 Press MENU 4 Scroll through the list and select Export 5 Browse to and select the location to export the file to 100 Turbo iDDR User Guide 6 Select the export file type MPEG File mpg SMPTE 360M exf Microsoft AVI avi Windows Media wmv To export media Format Export Settings Comment Microsoft Video 1 none Uncompressed none Microsoft DV Interleaved
266. r playlists created in workstation mode Before using Playlist mode Read the following sections before using Playlist mode e Terms used in Playlist mode on page 85 e Symbols used in Playlist mode on page 86 e Working with programs on page 86 e Using mixed aspect ratios in a playlist on page 87 e Inserting a clip that is still recording on page 87 e Inserting a playlist in a playlist workarounds on page 87 Terms used in Playlist mode The following terms are used in the Playlist mode Term Definition Playlist A list is a sequence of events Event Events are the components that make up a list Events are created by adding a clip or program to sections in a list Section Playlists created in Workstation operating mode contain at least one section All events in a playlist are contained in sections Sections have properties that include repeat and pause A playlist can have up to 100 sections Each section can contain up to 1000 events NOTE Playlists created in Front Panel mode do not have sections however when playlists created in Workstation mode are played in front panel mode section properties are used for playout just as they would in workstation mode Source Clip The clip inserted in a list to create a play event Program Playlists can be saved as a program in iDDR Workstation mode Programs created from a playlist include all the med
267. r user interface and to provide a successful network connection for streaming The host names added will appear in the Import and Send to dialog boxes NOTE By default the iDDR host name is the same as the Windows computer name To determine the iDDR computer name right click My Computer on the Windows desktop then properties Select the Network Identification tab and look for the Full computer name In addition if you are using remote protocol to perform video network transfers you ll need to assign a unique Controller ID number for each host name If you are not using remote protocol for network transfers you can leave the Controller Id blank Each hostname requires a unique ID on the local iDDR The controller ID is not global that is iDDR 2 may use controller ID 2 on one iDDR but controller ID 1 on another To add a network host names 1 Start AppCenter Workstation if it is not already running using the desktop shortcut 2 In AppCenter main menu select System then choose Configuration 3 Click the Remote tab The network host names are displayed Turbo iDDR User Guide 275 Chapter 6 Using an Ethernet connection 276 E Configuration for local Host Name Controller Id Modify Remove Cancel 4 Click Add to open the Add Host dialog box then do the following a Select the Host Name text entry control then enter the computer name of a peer iDDR Make sure to enter the exa
268. ransfer Cancel Aborting a transfer job 1 In Transfer Monitor select a transfer job in the list 2 Click Abort Removing transfer jobs from the completed list You can remove transfer jobs from the Completed page 1 In Transfer Monitor click Completed 2 Remove the transfer jobs using one of the following e Select the job s to remove then click Remove e Select the job s to remove then click Remove All 212 Turbo iDDR User Guide Managing media Managing media The AppCenter Clips Pane is used to manage the assets stored on the 1DDR Almost all the media management tasks you ll perform fall in the following topics e Guide to using the Clips Pane e Modifying the asset list view e Working with bins e Working with assets e Working with the Recycle Bin e Locating assets e Working with asset metadata e Viewing asset properties Turbo iDDR User Guide 213 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Guide to using the Clips Pane The Clips Pane in the iDDR user interface provides tools for managing assets stored on the media drives Assets include clips and playlists and programs In addition to the typical file management tasks such as browse copy move delete and managing the directory structure you ll also use the Clips Pane to transfer files to other devices and to import or export assets using standard file formats NOTE The Clips Pane in App
269. ration Channel Information Selected Channel Displays the active channel number The channel label appears in the upper left corner of every front panel display and menu Current Bin Shows the name of the current bin being displayed To change the current bin see Changing the current bin on page 105 Storage Indicator Graphically represents the remaining disk storage space lt Turbo iDDR User Guide 103 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control 104 Asset Buttons Clip Clip 7 00 00 05 00 Kids 0005 30 00 Property Icons Locked T Up converted a Down converted Turbo iDDR User Guide Clips are shown with a thumbnail the clip name and length List buttons are similar to clip buttons but show an extra layer to suggest multiple media references Appears when the asset has been locked Locked assets cannot be deleted Appears when the clip s aspect ratio does not match the play channel video output type This icon indicates that the clip will be up converted For example a clip with a 4 3 aspect ratio will be up converted to play out a video output set for a 16x9 widescreen aspect ratio Note that the same clip may have different conversion icons with different play channels The conversion icon follows the active channel When the recorder is active then the conversion icon is determined by play channel P1 video output setting NOTE If a list contains at least one event that needs t
270. re starting record Use Loop record mode Start recording immediately N A Press g crash record and then rename x the clip later Name the clip then press New Clip Enter clip length using on screen or external keyboard then press g NOTE Record stops when clip length is reached Fixed Length On j Enter loop length then press Loop Record _ 0n See About loop record mode on page 58 6 Record continues until Stop is pressed Additional information about IEEE 1394 devices When you start the recording the iDDR pre rolls the 1394 device several seconds then starts play back prior to capturing media This ensures the video frame cued in the channel monitor is recorded There is no audio monitoring facility on the Turbo iDDR for 1394 devices To monitor audio use the audio monitoring features on the DV device The timecode from the 1394 device is not recorded Rather the Turbo iDDR starts striping timecode for the clip starting at zero You can play the clip while it is still recording See Previewing a clip that is recording on page 67 Depending on the device s native format media captured via IEEE 1394 may require transcoding If transcoding is required media may not be captured in real time Previewing a clip that is recording Preview loads the currently recording clip into a play channel The play channel becomes the selected channel and the
271. recorded media of the source clip NOTE If more media exists outside the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed beneath the current event mark timecode To move event marks view the event in Event view then use one of the following methods to move clip marks e Using the Event In Out buttons on page 180 e Using the timecode entry controls on page 180 e Using the event length control on page 180 Turbo iDDR User Guide 179 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Using the Event In Out buttons To move clip marks 1 Use the transport controls to locate the desired frame NOTE If the List view is playing a list you cannot monitor video and audio of an event when you switch to the Event view The channel resources video and audio outputs are being used by the List view However you can still edit an event in Event view by using the event in out timecode controls to enter timecodes values 2 In Event view click Event In Event in to set mark in point or Event Out Event out to set mark out point 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event click Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event click Insert to add the event to the list Using the timecode entry controls 1 In Event view select the Event In or Event Out timecode contro 90 01 11 09 to open the timecode entry dialog box MS fark In 00 00 07 06 Clear 00064
272. red frame 3 Perform one of the following e Press the MARK IN 6 button to set mark in point e Press the MARK OUT E button to set mark out point Clearing clip marks If media exists outside the clip marks you can get access to that media by clearing the clip marks If more media exists after the clip marks a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed next to the In Out timecode To clear clip mark in or mark out 1 Load the clip in player 2 Perform one of the following e Press ESC SHIFT then MARK IN G i to clear the mark in point e Press ESC SHIFT then MARK OUT g to clear the mark out point Adjusting clip audio level The audio meter display provides audio level adjustment for clips loaded in the player display If the clip loaded was recording using Dolby digital audio AC3 the audio gain adjustments are disabled To adjust audio level 1 In the Player display touch the Audio button Selected Channel P1 00 26 00 05600000825 i Restore Clip_ Unity 0000 05 00 lofi E 00 00 00 00 ut E Save 00 00 05 00 j Levels lip_ cued 2 Do one of the following 78 Turbo iDDR User Guide Editing a clip e Use the touch screen or control knob to adjust graphical faders Only the selected faders are adjusted Pushing on the knob cycles selection between both left or right channels or e Touch Restore Unity a to return the audio to the recorded level 3 To
273. referenced source media has not been erased If the source media has been erased the subclip retains 1 second of media on each side of the mark in and mark out points See Moving clip mark in mark out points on page 154 The following sections describe how to create subclips e Creating Subclips on page 158 e About Auto Subclip mode on page 160 e Creating subclips in Cue view on page 160 To create subclips 1 Load a clip in the player 2 In the Player Control view click the Subclip button Turbo iDDR User Guide Creating Subclips 00 00 02 27 re 00 00 07 17 ae Subclip Clip_3 1 a me Source Wi fdefault Clip gt a In Out Length lt a COO z ZE The Subclip display appears with a new subclip loaded The In and Out buttons are flashing indicating no mark in or mark out points are defined The default subclip name follows the form lt source clip name gt lt number gt for example 1f the source clip name is PlayoffGame the subclip name is PlayoffGame 1 3 To rename the subclip click the subclip name control Subclip PlayoffGame and enter the new name in the Clip Name dialog then click OK or press Enter Renaming the subclip creates a new seed name For example if you rename the subclip PlayoffGame I to Highlight subsequent subclips created are named Highlight 1 Highlight 2 and so on 4 Enter the subclip marks as follows a Using the transport controls posit
274. rently being recorded yov ll see that the event mark out is set to the timecode of the last frame of video when event was initially created even though the source clip is still recording Thu E 7 i i les i E Tig ae al a Lo tir aoe mbnail By default an event uses the same thumbnail as the source clip You can select the thumbnail image to change the event thumbnail image to the current frame or to view the event properties Used to change the in and out points of the event These changes do not take effect until the event is inserted into the list using the Insert button in the case of a new event or the changes are accepted using the Accept button in the case of an existing clip Clicking Accept propagates event change to the event in the list Changes to the event are lost if you eject without selecting insert or accept as required Event In Out changes do not affect the source clip s mark in and out values but only the event s marks used by the Playlist Playlist Events View Menu PlayList ew Event Insert Event Locate Properties Options New Event Opens the New Event dialog box which allows you to navigate through the clips pane to select the source material for the new event Insert Event Inserts the loaded event in the list The event is inserted after the last selected event This menu item only appears when the event is not in the play list for instance after selectin
275. rkflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Button choices include New Clip Options Locate and Properties The buttons function the same as the context menu items Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source for recording 16 27 13 29 The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed if there is no input timecode Timecode Source The text displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the vite timecode source VITC LTC or INT internal generator See Changing the timecode source on page 138 Clip Name Edit Control Displays the clip s name and location in the media storage system Clip Clip_1 To rename the clip touch or click the Clip Name then use the ee default onscreen or external keyboard to enter text To change the current bin i e the target location for recording clips refer to Changing the current bin on page 139 Turbo iDDR User Guide 261 Chapter 5 Remote Control Control Description and User Operation Thumbnail Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is generated using the 16th frame of video Time Dome This control indicator displays record progress and available Progress storage By default the Time Dome indicates one revolution every Q Only 10 seconds or one revolution during a fixed length record
276. rkstation mode See Remote control operation In Workstation mode on page 255 About BVW protocol support You can use BVW protocol to control iDDR record and play channels External control devices can be connected via rear panel RS 422 serial connectors The iDDR supports a standard set of BVW commands used for VTR machine control BVW Insert Edit used by some edit control panels is not supported Making RS 422 or Ethernet connections Serial protocol control is available through three 9 pin RS 422 serial port connectors mounted on the 1DDR rear panel or through an Ethernet network connection AMP only e To make RS 422 cable connections using the following diagram e To make Ethernet connections and configure the Ethernet network refer to Using an Ethernet connection on page 271 Osteo eset jo eo RS 422 P1 RS 422 R1 RS 422 P2 Se 1 ZEN i i IRT WF 1 CY tineut TC In S PDIF SDI SD RECORDER Ps PR CMPST RS 422 P1 RS 422 R1 RS 422 P2 Ch 1 P1 Ch 2 Ch 1 R1 Ch 2 Ch 1 P2 Ch 2 O O O oO O oO A 4 Turbo iDDR User Guide 253 Chapter 5 Remote Control Remote control operation In front panel mode You can configure a channel for remote control operation from front panel mode If the channel is in use at the time all channel activity is terminated and the current media is ejecte
277. rmation to determine how to scale the video for playout e Clip aspect ratio attribute During record channel setup you must specify whether the record channel is recording standard or widescreen video This sets the clip aspect ratio attribute This attribute is saved as part of the media file and used when the clip is played to determine video scaling To set up the record channel see Modifying recorder channel R1 settings on page 39 e Play channel video type setting During play channel setup you must select the video output type for each play channel standard or high definition This will determine if the clip picture resolution needs up conversion or down conversion To set up the play channel video type see Adjusting video output timing on page 45 NOTE Some video output connectors become inactive for some video type selections See Video output connector compatibility on page 38 e Play channel aspect ratio conversion mode For each play channel you must specify one of three aspect ratio conversion modes to use when the picture image needs resized Selections include Bars Crop Bars amp Crop For more information see the next section About aspect ratio conversion modes About aspect ratio conversion modes The aspect ratio conversion mode or hint setting for the play channel determines how the picture image is resized for playout The following table shows the results of selectin
278. rol 265 Turbo iDDR User Guide protocol control only 259 Protocol Recorder local and protocol control 261 serial control protocols 28 252 AMP 252 BVW 253 monitoring communications 268 skipping to preview clip 267 removable media 100 201 RS 422 connector pinout 285 RS 422 control protocols 252 S safety certification 17 grounding 13 summary 13 terms and symbols 14 Scrub Bar 155 selecting data rate guidelines 38 send to another device 204 205 serial control 252 service safety summary 15 settings front panel 43 GPI input triggers 43 GPI output triggers 45 player channel 41 settings video scaling 36 shortcuts keyboard 282 software versions showing 248 specification AC Power 288 electrical 289 mechanical 289 StatusBar messages types 247 using 110 246 StatusPane 110 246 button icons 111 119 246 copying messages 248 opening 111 247 storage time available 129 subclips creating 146 support Grass Valley 11 system settings configuring 39 299 Index T thumbnail default 123 time cursor 169 time dome in Player 145 timecode intermittent or missing 58 125 replacing clip timecode 146 striping 58 125 Transfer Monitor 110 246 transferring assets to another device 204 205 transport controls displaying onscreen controls 124 front panel 51 trimming a clip 145 U USB drives using 100 201 V V drive 216 VDCP 252 ventilation 13 versions showing 248 video output timin
279. rran a Nita ete ocean ee a seciey 90 OAGING DIA VIS ica tec Steeda reece a made thaneatacar 91 Playing a Fe bY Co Oilers screen eerste a a neo men eee acer ere etree ence i 91 Playing at playlist mn OOP ModE csa a 92 Managing OLA VINES rasie a a edule baiehauiwetecieedwniee 92 Save d COPY OraADlaVS hiie a N 92 LOCK TPAIS riea a a genes 92 View information about a playlist ccccccccssseecceeesesseeeeesseeeeaeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeas 92 Rename a DIAY INSU aceon aa Sacre a a e a aA i 92 Locate a playlist in the Clips pane nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnesnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennsnnenen 92 Select multiple items in a PlayliSt kee ceeecccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeesseaeasaeaeess 92 Select all events in the playliSt cccccccccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaas 93 EGU sel OAV SI T aa us eee a a a a 94 Adding GPI output triggers to playlists ccccecccceceseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeas 96 Pausingial the end Oran CVG asiria a a 97 Importing and exporting media sseneannesesennnneenosenrnnresrnrrnnernrrrrrrnsrnrrrresrnrrnrneenne 97 PDO UMNO OMG MEGT osc a els T eae ated 98 Tompon A video IN Gs cer azck sects te nese rocoes teases siatnestaieacieeuteasateeeslecieseeckieeepacssigieeets 98 To impon astill IMAGES TINE pct we esieded cease aia ee dea hed ieai 98 About exporting media Werte terteeinee i etetenrteanr tr ete tertalee ees ee eee etre Cee ren erae eats ee eee 100 TO eX DOM MEAT a
280. rrent clip in the record channel is loaded in play channel P1 NOTE You can use Eject prior to Preview if a clip is already loaded in the Play channel Cue Next Goes to next event in a Playlist and stops Event Cue Prev Goes to previous event in a Playlist and stops Event VAR Plays loaded clip in variable speed play mode with Playback pre set speed as set in Modifying the front panel setup on page 43 Active High Select the active signal high or low required This is determined by the external equipment connected Low Turbo iDDR User Guide to the GPI input Setting GPI output triggers Setting GPI output triggers To access GPI input settings e On the front panel press MENU oh then choose Tools using the control knob and select GPI Output Triggers or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration click GPI then click the GPl Output tab On the GPI Output Triggers menu And make settings as needed select Channel None No GPI output triggers are set R1 Channel R1 triggers the GPI output P1 Channel P1 triggers the GPI output P2 Channel P2 triggers the GPI output Name GPI Out X Enter the name of the action triggered by the GPI output Active High Select the active signal high or low required This is determined by the external equipment connected to the Low GPI output Adjusting video output timing When integrating the 1DDR into a video syste
281. s on page 83 Importing and exporting media on page 97 Managing media on page 102 Monitoring operation using the Status Bar on page 110 Turbo iDDR User Guide 49 Chapter 3 Operation Front Panel Control Guide to using the front panel This section includes the following topics e Enabling front panel control mode on page 50 e Locking the front panel on page 50 e Using the front panel controls on page 51 e Conventions used in the front panel display on page 55 Enabling front panel control mode Workstation Mode Clip_13 Clip_ Clip_ OO 00 30 00 f OO 00 05 00 00 00 05 00 Wo ideFaulk 1 of 1 1 of 1 In In In 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000 uk uk uk 00 00 05 21 00 00 05 00 00 00 05 00 Storage OF 235 18 00 remaining 08 00 00 00 total Front panel display in Workstation mode If your iDDR is in Workstation mode you can switch to front panel control mode using the front panel controls or from Workstation display on the VGA monitor NOTE When the iDDR switches to front panel mode AppCenter releases control of all iDDR channels and operation is interrupted To enable to front panel control mode do one of the following e In AppCenter click View then select Front Panel OF e On the front panel press oh then select Front Panel Locking the front panel Locking the front panel prevents accidental interruption of iDDR operation e T
282. s No Configuration Manager only 40 Turbo iDDR User Guide Modifying player channel P1 and P2 settings Modifying player channel P1 and P2 settings For help in making output type and aspect ratio settings refer to About video scaling settings on page 36 To access player channel settings e On the front panel press MENU oh then choose Tools using the control knob and select P1 or P2 Setup A or e In the Workstation AppCenter select System Configuration click Channel and select the P1 or P2 tab Select a menu item And make settings as needed Video Output Video Output NTSC SD Select the video format for the play Format XGA 1024 X channel s 768 WXGA 1365 X 768 1080i 1920x1080 Aspect Ratio Standard These choices available when Video Widescreen output type is NTSC PAL or XGA Aspect Ration Bars Refer to About video scaling settings Conversion Crop on page 36 Bars and Crop Output RGB Select your component type Component Type _Y Pb Pr Output Pedestal On Select the appropriate pedestal setting Off Still play mode Still Play mode settings determine how to generate the still play signal for the play channel when it is setup to freeze on last frame of video in stop mode You can select line interpolated or interlaced Note that in normal play mode the play channel can be setup for E to E mode instead of displaying freeze frame in stop mode E to E mo
283. s and house fire For an exact phrase search use a single quote or double quote to specify the phrase For example if you enter forest fire search will locate all asset names that contain the phrase forest fire If the Search names only option is selected the search is applied to asset names If not selected the search includes all asset metadata Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 238 z Look in V default F Text Ki Date M Type Find items that contain the following text forest Advanced z Search names only Cancel Search by date If you are searching for assets created or modified within a specific date or time range use the Date tab By default the All Dates box is selected To specify date criteria select the Find items option to enable the controls under it Use the drop down list to choose Created or Modified then do one of the following e Select the between option and then specify a date range Click the edit control to display a calendar for easy input e Select the in the last option and then use the drop down lists to specify a time within a recent number of minutes hours days or months Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating assets Look in default All dates Advanced Find items Created between 09 29 03 and 10 29 03 in the last 1 Days 4 x Cancel Search by Type In the Type tab select the type of assets clips programs or lists
284. s in front panel control mode These features include search adding user metadata and more See Managing media on page 213 for more information Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using the Clips display Guide to using the Clips display The Clips display is use to manage assets stored on the iDDR internal disk drives Assets include clips and playlists and programs In addition to the typical file management tasks such as browse copy move delete and managing the directory structure yov ll also use the clips pane to transfer files to other devices and to import or export assets using standard file formats See Importing and exporting media on page 97 and Transferring media between Turbo iDDRs on page 204 NOTE Even though you are in front panel operation mode you can still manage assets and monitor channel status using the AppCenter Workstation Clips pane Z7 e To show the clips display press the Clips button The following table describes the Clips display Current Bin Storage Channel ae V default Il indicator Information Clip 7 a PE a pa E a3 Button Clip _7 Clip_s Clip_9 Clip_10 dial les 00 00 05 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 30 00 ozsa TT Sone a hi Playlist Hy B utton oT Me e i Kids Meet Halloween 2 Halloween 3 OOS 30 00 01 29 00 00 00 04 05 09 f 00 05 30 00 Status Player 1 Clip cued in Bar Control Description and User Ope
285. s within the clip You can add cue points while the clip is playing or in stop mode When you add a cue point it is listed by a default name such as cue_1 and timecode value Cue points cannot be moved however you can remove a cue point and use the transport controls or Goto Timecode dialog box to enter a new cue point at the current position Cue points can be used to e Manage clip playout jump to the selected cue or next cue e Create subclips You can create a subclip from the selected cue point The selected cue point becomes the mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip If more than one cue point is selected a subclip is created using the first and last cue points The Create All feature creates a subclip for every cue in the list Each subclip duration is from each cue point to the source clip mark out point See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 160 When working with cue points keep these considerations in mind e Cue points are retained when a clip is copied or transferred Cue points are stored with the clip All the cue points of the original clip are retained when the clip is copied or transferred to another 1DDR e Cue points and trimming After you trim a clip by moving the mark in or mark out points the cue points outside the new mark in and mark out points are Turbo iDDR User Guide Using Cue points for playback cleared and must be reinserted e C
286. sPane clears the state of the subsystem indicators so they no longer display the alert and warning symbols e Click Clear All messages are removed from the StatusPane Closing the StatusPane e Click Close 248 Turbo iDDR User Guide Using the StatusPane Exporting log files The procedures in this section describe how to export the Turbo iDDR and Windows Operating system log files The Turbo iDDR log files include all applications messages the Windows Event Log and messages related to managing the media file system The exported log files can be sent to Thomson Grass Valley product support where they can be examined to analyze the operation of your iDDR NOTE Export Log does not export StatusPane messages To capture StatusPane messages refer to Copying messages to the clip board on page 290 Use one of the following procedures to export the log files Exporting log files using the StatusPane 1 Select System Export Log The ExportLog dialog box is displayed ExportLog Destination N Logs Save in Desktop My Computer My Network Places File Name my_i DR_Log In the ExportLog dialog box browse to locate the destination directory Select the File Name edit control then enter a file name for the exported log file Use the Logs tab to select the log files to export Click Export When the export confirmation message appears click OK NI NWN On A W N Retrieve the log files and s
287. sencqee lt Seuudeacach sad sdaueseeotedoeicemeniaecnunaey 289 Electrical SPECICATION S srca a a E 289 senak Digital Videod SDI aene aa a a R rE 290 Composte Anab VO ies ee Se ate ee ne neta tae 290 Sp 4 0 0 Sonera ener reer a eaeten rt Sin ene Rereee setae OeRene rte eee mete nent oe ree eee eee eae 291 Analog Component Video 1 0 cccccccssssessesecceeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeseceeeeeesssaaasesseeeeeeeeess 291 GEnlOCK Referee e ea a a 292 Sye TIMIN esaa a EE 292 S PDIF Digtal AUdiO sese eiiean a aaa eaea aaea ada are i aaa aae En 293 ANAT AU Ones a E eda Lu aab aaeee cau eay ten ase nases 293 Audio headphone output with front panel Option ccceeccceecseeeseeseeeeeseeees 293 IMU OUND enea Seo dk Se eaters sects csemocteneaencedit a aa nesraneweene cuieneraeasitnees 293 FIO A22 SDCCIN CAO stsicccneheed seis Seretihrs cicada a 294 GIP TO SOCCIIGAUOINS sanaa Sea psec ad Saxdutincee E E 294 IEEE 1394A interface specification cccceecccecceeseeeeceeeececeaeeeeseaeeessesageessseees 294 Operational specifications cccecceeeeseeeeeceeeceeeesaeeaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaas 295 Media file system PerfOrmancCe cccccsssseececcecceeeeeeeeecaessseeeeesaeaaaeeeeeeessaeeeeess 295 Video network PerfOrMancCe cccssecccccssseeeceeseececceeseeeeeeueeeeceaseseeeseeeeseeteneeeeees 295 Composite analog video input performance cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeaeeeeees 295 EK arct
288. ser Guide Modifying the asset list view Menu Item Description Cut Copy Paste Used to move assets or make a additional copies Copying a clip does not consume media disk space Only a new reference to existing media is created See Moving an asset to another bin on page 224 Rename Opens the Rename dialog box for the selected asset See Renaming a bin on page 223 or Renaming an asset on page 224 Delete Deletes the selected asset See Deleting a bin on page 223 or Deleting an asset on page 227 Links Opens the Links dialog box allowing you to locate other assets that are linked to the selected asset See Finding linked assets on page 236 Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 242 Modifying the asset list view The asset list in the Clips Pane displays the contents of the current bin and the results from searches or from requests for linked assets You can choose one of three views to best suit your workflow 1 Select Clips Options Image Details Create Date Modified Date Length Type Location Cancel 2 In the View tab select one of the following view options Image view Search New Bin Turbo iDDR User Guide Y default 219 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 220 Displays the asset name and thumbnail image for eac
289. set of media drives that functions as a single physical disk in the iDDR The volume name used in the 1DDR is V for the internal drives Bin A bin is a container used to organize assets like clips and lists in the same way as directories or folders are used on a typical computer system A bin is associated with a single disk volume Current Bin The current bin functions as the target bin when recording clips or creating playlists It is also the source bin used to load clips and lists Turbo iDDR User Guide 123 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation 124 Selecting the channel mode When the Turbo iDDR is started each channel comes up in its last used mode From the factory Recorder mode starts on the record channel and Player mode starts on both play channels To change channel modes in the monitor pane select the channel mode drop down list Player for the channel then choose a mode The selected mode replaces the current mode and appears in the channel s space in the channel pane The channel becomes the selected channel Using on screen transport controls All channel modes have on screen transport controls Rewind Stop Forward Play Record Progress Bar a en e CHlaloln 4 Cue to mark in Cue to mark ou Field Reverse Field Advance Single click to Single click to reverse one field advance one field Recording clips The recorder display is used to record clips on the iDDR You can play t
290. settings in Configuration Manager at once to their default values as explained in the following procedure This is useful for test purposes or for removing site specific settings when re installing at a new site AppC enter Workstation To restore all settings at once to their default values 1 If you want to save current settings you should work through the previous procedure Saving and restoring your settings before proceeding 2 In the Configuration Manager dialog click Restore The default settings are loaded into Configuration Manager but they have not yet been saved and put into effect 3 Click OK to save settings and close Configuration Manager Front Panel To restore all settings at once to their default values e On the front panel press MENU So choose Tools using the control knob and select Restore Defaults Turbo iDDR User Guide 35 Chapter 2 Configuration Turbo iDDR 36 About video scaling settings The iDDR video scaling feature allows you to play clips with different aspect ratios and picture resolutions on the same play channel For example a play channel configured to output standard definition SD video can play high definition HD clips The HD clip picture resolution is down converted to SD and if needed the aspect ratio is converted in the process Similarly SD clips are up converted when played on a play channel configured to output HD video The play channel uses the following info
291. sk volume Use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter the bin name See Creating a new bin on page 222 Empty Recycle Bin Permanently removes all items from the Recycle Bin By default deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin and remain there until it is emptied See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 230 for information on deleting assets without using the Recycle Bin Rename Opens the Rename dialog box for the selected asset See Renaming a bin on page 223 or Renaming an asset on page 224 Delete Deletes the selected asset See Deleting a bin on page 223 or Deleting an asset on page 227 Select All Selects all items in the asset list Operations available for Select All include delete send to and copy See Selecting multiple assets on page 224 Turbo iDDR User Guide 217 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Menu Item Description Search Opens the Search dialog box which is used to perform basic or advanced searches See Locating assets on page 230 Links Opens the Links dialog box allowing you to locate other assets that are linked to the selected asset For example a subclip is linked to the source clip See Locating assets on page 230 Send To Opens the Send To dialog box which is used to send assets to a different location another bin disk volume or another iDDR Send To is also used to export clips or programs
292. sort order Working with bins This section includes e Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 221 e Changing the current bin on page 221 e Creating a new bin on page 222 e Deleting a bin on page 223 e Renaming a bin on page 223 Changing current bin using Look in drop down list e In the Clips Pane click the Current Bin label then choose a bin from the list J e default Organize Bins default Recycle Bin rmy bin Search v clip Search Vi Created Last 3 Days Changing the current bin Exploring a bin in the Organize Bins dialog box causes it to become the current bin 1 In the Clips Pane select the Current Bin drop down list PAPI RE then select Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a bin then click Explore Turbo iDDR User Guide 221 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation W Organize Bins Type Items Created oy default New Bin Bin Explore 35 D47 05 12 24 PM 3 Close the Organize Bins dialog box 4 The bin becomes the destination bin for recording and the source bin for loading clips for playing for all channel operations Creating a new bin 1 Open the Organize Bin dialog box using one of the following methods e Select Clips New Bin e Click the New Bin button in the clips pane e In the Clips Pane Select the Current Bin drop down list then select Organize Bins
293. st on Insert Event page 174 Add Section Adds a section to the end of the list Once you add the 4dd Section section you can move it See Managing sections in a list on page 183 New List New List Opens the New List dialog box where you can choose the Open List current bin and specify the new list name before creating it When a Rename List new list is created the current list is ejected and the new list is Save Os Program created containing one section and no events See Creating a simple playlist on page 174 Locate Open List Closes the current list and allows you to open an Properties existing list See Playing a list on page 177 Rename List Rename the list currently loaded in Playlist mode Move Up Save As Program Saves the current list as a program The new ava Donin program is listed in the clips pane with other assets Programs can be played using the Player mode or inserted in a list in Playlist mode Sen es See Saving a list as a program on page 195 Options Locate Locates the list or source clip for an event depending on the selection in the clips pane See Locating a playlist in the clips pane on page 194 or Locating the event source clip on page 183 Properties Opens the properties dialog box for the selected item list section or play event Properties dialog box includes pages for setting up list timecode adding metadata and setting list attrib
294. stall any Windows updates these are distributed by Thomson Grass Valley 2 In the Windows taskbar select Start Control Panel Network and Internet Connections and continue with standard Windows procedures to configure the TCP IP protocol properties on each Turbo iDDR on the network You can setup the network using DHCP DNS WINS or other standard networking mechanisms NOTE For a small network without a DHCP server or domain name server DNS you can set up a static IP address and create a Host file on each iDDR The Host file specifies a device name for each IP address used on the network Refer to the Windows documentation or your network administrator for more information Turbo iDDR User Guide Enable streaming Adding network hosts names 3 Shutdown and restart Windows 4 If you are going to stream video between 1DDRs proceed to Enable streaming Adding network hosts names on page 275 otherwise the 1DDR is ready for standard data networking tasks NOTE If you have a problem with the network try using the ping utility in the Windows command prompt Use either the IP address or host name Troubleshoot as needed Also refer to the Turbo iDDR Service Manual for troubleshooting procedures Enable streaming Adding network hosts names You must add the host names of all peer iDDRs on the network that support streaming transfers Adding host names is required to allow selection of networked 1DDRs in the AppCente
295. system on page 279 The majority of the internal SATA disk drive space is reserved for media storage The size of the media storage partition is fixed and cannot be modified Related topics AN Managing media on page 102 NY Disk Storage Indicator on page 56 O Managing media on page 213 Displaying available storage space on page 141 Turbo iDDR User Guide Front panel controls and indicators Front panel controls and indicators The front panel includes the following controls and indicators Drive Bay SF mara ie Op mta OG KONG Standby button Front Panel Controls See page 50 Power on indicator 1394A Drive busy indicator Connector Head phone jack USB 2 0 amp volume control Connector VAN WARNING The power standby switch does not turn off power to the system The system must be disconnected from the power source Control or Indicator Description Standby Button Provides system On Off control NOTE If you believe your iDDR is hung in an unresponsive state you can perform a forced shutdown by pressing and holding the standby button for approximately five seconds Power On Indicator Indicates the standby switch is in the On position and operates as follows On Power is on and the Turbo iDDR is operational Blinking Turbo needs service Refer to the Turbo iDDR Service Manual Drive
296. t Loop Play in the pop up menu Set Mark in and Set Mark out These buttons are used to set new mark in or mark out points Position the clip to the desired frame then click or touch the In or Out buttons Unused media is not deleted To clear a mark hold down the button for longer than one second then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu Marks are reset to the beginning or end of available media See Editing a clip on page 154 Meter Bar Button s Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio play level controls and signal meters Changes to the audio level can be saved with the clip See Adjusting clip audio level on page 156 Using AMP Recorder Local control tasks In local control mode you can perform all the tasks locally that are available in the standard recorder application while the record channel is still under remote control For a full description of all the tasks you can perform using the Recorder user interface refer to Guide to using Recorder mode on page 128 264 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Using AMP Player Local control tasks In local mode the Player user interface operates just like the standard Player application For a full description of all the tasks you can perform using the Player user interface refer to Selecting Player mode in AppCenter on page 143 In addition the following sections describe tasks that are unique
297. t View the Event Name control displays lt No event loaded gt You can then create a new event or return to the List View The section name that the event belongs to is displayed directly below the event name When viewing an event that is not in the list Section lt not in list gt is displayed beneath the event name Countdown Timecode Displays the time to end of event 01 04 59 29 Turbo iDDR User Guide 171 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Control Description and User Operation View tabs These tabs toggle between List View and Events view Insert and Accept Buttons Insert Button Displayed when editing a new event that is not yet in the list Inserts the current event into the list after the currently selected event Accept Button Displayed when editing an event in a list Propagates changes you made to the event properties to the event in the list for example event marks thumbnail or end properties Opens the Goto dialog box which allows you to jump to a specific timecode in the event Time Dome 8 00 00 03 23 Displays a graphical representation of the current position between the event s marks with an empty Time Dome representing the current position at event in and a full dome representing the current position at event out The time remaining from the current position is displayed beneath the Time Dome When playing media that is cur
298. t marks so that the thumbnail is outside of the event s media the thumbnail is automatically changed to correspond to the event s mark in position 182 Turbo iDDR User Guide Managing sections in a list Locating the event source clip The locate menu item is used to locate and select the source clip in the clips pane that is used to generate an event To locate the source clip e Select the event in List view then select Playlist Locate The source clip is selected in the clips pane Viewing event properties 1 Select the event in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist Properties e Click the Properties button e Right click the event and select Properties W Clip_12 Properties ra Marne Clip_1z Type Clip Location VijfdeFault Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TZ 1 Format HTSZ Mon DropFrame Compression MpegstdDeF Sizes ME yhes Length 00 00 00 00 Created 05 0205 05 30 PM Modified 05 02 05 05 30 PM Aspect Ratio Unknown Locked Cancel Related topics e To pause at the end of an event on page 187 Managing sections in a list A list has as least one section and all events belong to a section Sections management tasks include the following e Adding and removing sections e Moving and copying sections e Renaming sections Turbo iDDR User Guide 183 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation
299. t recorded Instead the clip timecode is striped using the iIDDR record channel internal timecode generator Start timecode is automatically set to 00 00 00 00 294 Turbo iDDR User Guide Operational specifications Operational specifications Media file system performance e Maximum number of clips 20 000 e Minimum record to play time 5 second from start of record Video network performance The 1DDR supports streaming video network transfers between iDDRs and M Series i1VDRs using General Exchange Format GXF as described in SMPTE 360M e 100BaseT Network Performance gt 33Mb s with all channels operating at 15Mb s e 1GBaseT performance gt 80Mb s with all channels operating at 15Mb s e Ethernet streaming and Ethernet control on the same network adapter interface 1s allowed Composite analog video input performance The iDDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices 1 e VHS or U Matic VTRs and low cost cameras However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal conditioning products 1 e timebase correction Turbo iDDR User Guide 295 Appendix C Specifications 296 Turbo iDDR User Guide Index A active channel 123 adjusting video output timing 45 Advanced Search adding search criteria 236 AES EBU audio specification 293 AMP 252 analog audio connector pin out 285 AppCenter applications standard 12
300. te the knob to set the play speed RANGE 1x normal playback speed otherwise speed remains at the preset play speed or the last variable play speed used Variable play speed is implemented using interpolated line and field smoothing NOTE Preset can be set to 25x 5x or 75x Initial play speed can be set to start at either the preset speed or the last play speed set by the Jog Shuttle knob Scroll and Select items Used in the front panel display to make selections Rotate the knob to highlight items in lists or menus that appear in the front panel display then push in bump the knob to select the highlighted item Playing a playlist Stop Press STOP to stop play E Play Press PLAY to start playing the list from the current position Time gt Cursor Rewind Hold down REW then release the button to cause the list to return Na to the previous mode Fast Forward Hold down FF then release the button to cause the list to I return to the previous mode 52 Turbo iDDR User Guide Using the front panel controls Skip to previous event in a list Hold down STOP or SHIFT then press oO b REW EPRE Ese 144 Skip to next event in a list Hold down STOP
301. tenance mode to allow maintenance on the media disk subsystem Refer to the Turbo iDDR Service Manual for procedures Shutdown Shutdown the Windows operating system and power off the iDDR NOTE If you believe your iDDR is hung in an unresponsive state you can perform a forced shutdown by pressing and holding the standby button for approximately five seconds AN WARNING The power standby switch does not turn off power to the system The system must be disconnected from the power source 30 Turbo iDDR User Guide Accessing the Windows operating system Accessing the Windows operating system Some tasks require access to the Windows operating system that runs on the Turbo iDDR for example modifying network settings To access the Windows desktop 1 If in front panel mode power off the iDDR then connect a keyboard mouse and VGA monitor 2 Press the front panel standby switch to Power on The iDDR initializes then starts the Windows operating system which automatically logs on using the Administrator user account A Turbo iDDR User Guide CAUTION The Turbo iDDR is not a general purpose Windows workstation The Windows configuration on the iDDR has been specifically set for use as a real time device The Turbo iDDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley Support Th
302. the thumbnail position the clip to the desired frame then click the thumbnail See Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 157 Time Dome Progress only 00 00 03 23 Progress with media marks This multi function control displays play progress or play progress with media marks which shows the relative position of mark in mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play time remaining The Time Dome is also used to enable loop play Select the Time Dome then use the pop up menu to choose the display mode or to control loop play mode See Selecting loop play on page 150 00 00 02 15 P Progress amp loop play o0 00 08 21 enabled Set Mark in and Set These buttons are used to set new mark in or mark out points Mark out Position the clip to the desired frame then click the In or Out buttons Unused media is not deleted To clear a mark right click the button then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu Marks are reset to the beginning or end of available media See Editing a clip on page 154 Meter Bar Button s Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio play level controls and signal meters Clicking the Save button saves changes made to the clip audio level Clicking Unity returns the audio levels to the last saved level 00 00 01 22 Gang Unity Save naje 4 Turbo iDDR User Guide 145 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstat
303. time 5 seconds In other words playback in loop record can start no sooner than 5 seconds after the start of record e Modifying the loop record name or length You can modify the loop record name or length during record If you reduce record length the oldest media outside the new record length is erased e Stopping loop record If the recording is stopped before the fixed length is reached the resulting program duration is the time elapsed since the recording started Like normal record mode you cannot stop then start a loop recording Once record is stopped you must eject the program and create a new loop record e Transferring the loop record program The loop record program cannot be transferred to a file or networked device until record is stopped e Loop record storage space is not reserved Loop record is allowed to start as long as the record length you enter is less than the available storage however the storage space 1s not reserved For example you may have enough storage space to start the loop record but you are still allowed to transfer media or otherwise fill disk space Warning messages are displayed in the AppCenter StatusBar when available storage reaches 10 total disk space All recording is halted when media storage reaches its full threshold e Pausing the loop record program in Player mode You cannot pause the loop record program in Player mode indefinitely Eventually the record length is reached and the vide
304. tion Turbo iDDR User Guide 185 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation MS List 7 Properties List_7 ti List i Fl Location vijdeFault Data Tracks wideo 1 Audio AC3 TC 1 Format HTSZ Timecode Compression MpegstdDeF Length O0 01 02 27 End Sections 1 Ewents 7 Created OS 02 2005 11 34 AM Modified os 02 2005 03 14 PM Locked 3 Click OK to close To repeat or pause at the end of a section To force a pause at the end of all section events 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Select the list icon in the event list then click the Properties button e Right click on a list and select Properties 3 Click All Events 4 Select the Change event pauses check box then choose the Add a pause to every event option 186 Turbo iDDR User Guide Adding play effects W Section 1 Properties P Section 1 Location vi fdeFault List_ General Change event pauses Remove all pauses dd a pause to every event Freeze on last frame Cancel 5 Use the drop down list to choose whether to Freeze on last frame Freeze on next event Show black or Show E to E 6 Click OK Each event s properties are modified to include the specified pause type During playback each event will remain paused at its end until you intervene The pause symbol ae appears n
305. to another networked device Asset List Displays the list of assets located in the current bin Select from three view You can scroll through the list using the up down arrow keys on an options Text Image or external keyboard Right click to open the Asset Context menu Details See About the asset context menu on page 218 You can change how assets are shown by selecting the view option View options include Image thumbnail Text or Details includes thumbnail and detailed text See Modifying the asset list view on page 219 Assets recorded using a different video standard or compression type than the current system setting cannot be loaded and played These assets will appear greyed in the Clips Pane asset list This example shows the appearance of a PAL clip when the iDDR is set to NTSC Turbo iDDR User Guide 215 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation Control Description and User Operation Clips Menu See About the asset context menu on page 218 Insert Event Add Section Mew List Open List Rename List Save Os Program Locate Properties Move Up Move Down Goto Options Terms used in the Clips Pane The following table describes the terms used in the Clips Pane Asset Description Bin A container used to organize assets similar to a directory or folder on a computer A bin is contained within a disk volume
306. to free media storage space If the media outside the clip marks is referenced by a subclip program or event from a playlist that media is not erased Subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming To erase unused media e In front panel mode see Erasing a clip s unused media on page 107 e In Workstation mode see Erasing a clip s unused media on page 147 Clearing the media file system When you need to remove all media from the Turbo 1DDR you should use the Clear File System operation rather than deleting all the clips manually The Clear File System operation returns the iDDR media storage system to its initial state as it was when you received it from the factory This operation also clears up any ongoing maintenance issues that can occur over time such as fragmented media drives AN WARNING Clearing the media file system will permanently remove all media stored on the iDDR Refer to the Turbo iDDR Troubleshooting and Service Guide for instructions on clearing media Running Storage Utility Mode If the media storage system needs service work you must restart the machine in storage maintenance mode In this mode all normal operations are suspended and only storage utility runs You should only restart in storage maintenance mode 1f instructed to do so by a service procedure as documented in the Turbo iDDR Troubleshooting and Service Guide
307. to the AMP protocol player applications e Playout using current and preview clips e Skipping to the preview clip during playout e Jumping to a specific timecode Playout using current and preview clips The AMP Player applications use a two head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Current clip The preset id is considered the current clip that controls channel resources 1 e video audio and timecode outputs e Preview clip The preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip If you don t need this functionality you can use the protocol player applications just like the standard player loading and playing a single clip See Loading media for playout on page 149 and Playing a clip on page 150 To playout using current and preview clips 1 Select View Split Screen if you are not in Split Screen view already 2 Select a play channel using the front panel button P or the play channel tab in the Tools pane 3 In the protocol player click or touch the thumbnail image to place the current clip thumbnail in front of the preview thumbnail 4 Load a clip from the Clips pane using one of the following e Click or touch the clip and drag it to the Player pane e Rotate the front panel Selection Knob to select a cli
308. ts can be used to trigger external equipment when the list plays Before you can use GPI output triggers in a list you must assign GPI outputs to the play channel using the Tools menu See Setting GPI output triggers on page 45 NOTE If you want to play a list that was created on another play channel you must ensure that GPI triggers for the play channels use the same names otherwise the GPI triggers will not occur Using identical GPI naming also allows copying and pasting events between lists Adding GPI output triggers 1 Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist then press MENU oh and choose Add Effect 2 Use the control knob to highlight a GPI Output in the Add Effect menu then push in the knob to select Mark s Kids 00 05 30 00 La GPI Out 1 In 00 00 00 00 a GPI Position Out Start of Event 00 00 05 00 End of Event Player 1 Untite NOTE If no GPI outputs are listed use the configuration Tool to assign GPI outputs to the current channel then return to this step Setting GPI output triggers on page 45 3 Use the control knob to highlight a GPI Position then push in the knob to select Action Trigger point Start of event First frame of event End of event Last frame of event The GPI trigger symbol ve is displayed on the event thumbnail Removing GPI output triggers e Rotate the control knob to select an event in the playlist then press MENU p and
309. uch Save Levels to save the audio level changes for the clip Saved audio levels are used every time the clip is loaded and played Unsaved changes are lost when the clip is ejected 4 Press the ESC SHIFT button to return to the player display Changing the clip thumbnail image The clip thumbnail is displayed in AppCenter for visual identification of the clip By default the 16th frame is used to generate the thumbnail image To change the clip thumbnail 1 While monitoring the play channel output use the transport controls to position the clip to the desired video frame 2 Press Menu oh then use the control knob to choose Change Thumbnail NOTE If clip marks are edited so that the video frame used to generate the thumbnail is outside the new clip marks the thumbnail is reset to a position near the mark in of the modified clip Striping timecode replacing the timecode track The stripe timecode dialog allows you to overwrite the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace the recorded timecode with time of day or a specific start timecode value 1 Load the clip into a play channel 2 Press MENU fA then the control knob to choose Stripe Timecode 3 Specify the replacement timecode Time of Day The new timecode track will start with the current time of day and will contain continuous values ranging from the current time of day plus the length of the clip Fixed Time After choosing this opti
310. ue points and subclips Subclips created from a clip with cue points retain all cue points that fall between the marks of the new subclip The subclip has its own mark in and mark out points See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 160 e Cue points and programs Cue points cannot be added to a program Viewing the cue list 1 Select a play channel by clicking in the channel s monitor pane or by using the front panel button or l 2 Select the Cue tab The Cue view appears showing the cue list for the clip loaded in Player mode Initially only the mark in and mark out cue points are listed Adding a cue point While the clip is playing or in the stop mode use the transport controls to find the desired frame in the clip then do one of the following e Click the Add Cue button e Select Player Add Cue A cue point is added to the cue list using a unique name e g Cue_1 NOTE Using the iDDR preview feature you can play and add cue points to a clip while it is still being recorded See Previewing a clip that is recording on page 137 Related topics e Jump to the next cue point on page 154 e Removing a cue point on page 153 Removing a cue point 1 In Cue view select a cue point in the list 2 Do one of the following e Click the Remove button or e Select Player Remove J ump to the selected cue point Use the following steps to jump to the selected cue point 1 In Cue view s
311. uickTime Supported still image and image sequence file formats You can import still images and image sequence files from local Windows drives or networked devices Imports are recorded using the aspect ratio and resolution you specify Still images are imported as a clip with a duration that you specify Supported file types include jpg bmp tiff tga gif png NOTE Before playing a clip that is being imported from a file or stream use the Transfer Monitor to verify that the clip transfer rate is higher than the clip data rate This is required to prevent playback problems due to insufficient bandwidth To importa video file When you import media from a file the media is converted and stored using the iDDR native file format To importa still image file You can import still image or image sequence files When imported the image is recorded as a clip using the duration aspect ratio and resolution you specify 1 Press CLIPS Press MENU Scroll through the list and select Import Browse to locate the file you want to import and select it using the control knob nA A WwW N Rename the file if desired Use the on screen keyboard to change the filename then touch Done or press Enter on an external keyboard 98 Turbo iDDR User Guide To import a still image file Refer to the following table to choose import options What type of image is this Fixed duration Select if importing th
312. umbnail to the current position The first play event and the list now have the same thumbnail Turbo iDDR User Guide Managing playlists Locking a playlist You can lock a list to prevent changes from being made 1 Make sure that the list to be locked is selected in the list pane 2 Open the list properties dialog box doing one of the following e Select Playlist List Properties e Select the list icon in the event list then click the Properties button e Right click on the list and select Properties 3 Click General then choose the Locked option MS List 7 Properties E List 7 i List eee Location Vi fdefault Data Tracks Wideo 1 Audio AC3 TC 1 Format HTSC Timecode Compression MpegstdDeF Length 00 01 02 27 End Sections 1 Events 7 Created oS 02 2005 11 34 AM Madified 05 02 2005 03 14 PM Locked Cancel 4 Click OK to close The lock symbol cg appears next to the list in List view Setting the playlist timecode The playlist timecode is displayed in the List view toolbar This selection is also used to generate LTC timecode for the play channel To select the playlist timecode 1 Open playlist properties dialog by performing one of the following e In List view select Playlist List Properties e In List view click the Properties button e Right click on a list and select Properties The List Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Click Timecode in the properties dial
313. utes that will occur when playback reaches the end of the list Options include repeat or pause See Viewing playlist properties on page 194 Section properties and event properties dialog boxes include options for setting the end behavior repeat or pause and GPI output properties See Viewing playlist properties on page 194 Move Up Moves the selected event up in the list See Editing and rearranging events in a playlist on page 178 Move Down Moves the selected event down in the list See Editing and rearranging events in a playlist on page 178 Goto Opens the Goto pop up menu which allows you to jump to selection next event next section or a timecode that you specify See Playing a list on page 177 Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to select the asset list view e g Text or Thumbnail view and choose the list monitoring information displayed in the Playlist mode and the monitor pane See Selecting Text or Thumbnail view on page 173 Guide to using Playlist mode Event View The Playlist Event View allows you to create a new event before inserting it into the play list or to edit an existing event s properties Selecting the Event tab displays the Event view Note that you cannot open Event View while the list is playing The following describes the basic controls in the Event View 170 Turbo iDDR User Guide Guide to using Playlist mode Event View Creat
314. ving ja AN C Temp clip_2 gxf eter Status Dione Remove Sending Clip_14 Source Vi defaultclip_14 pumpleted Dest C Temp clip_3 gxf Status Done Clip_13 Source Vs default Clip_13 Dest C Tempclip_1 1 gst Status Done Completed Page The Completed page displays all jobs that have completed successfully Completed jobs are automatically cleared after approximately 36 hours You can manually clear jobs from the completed list using Remove or Remove All Turbo iDDR User Guide 209 Chapter 4 Operation AppCenter Workstation E Transfer Monitor Proper o gi WDR Receiving i Y defaultclip_1 ahi O 9MB s 5 PEMONE Sending Completed aa Y default clip_2 O OMB s 12 Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer Monitor Each transfer job is displayed in the Transfer Monitor with a thumbnail image along with a brief description of its source destination and status For jobs that have encountered errors they are shown in red You may find more detailed information about a transfer job from its Properties page e Source The source of the transfer job If the source includes multiple files the first file name is displayed plus a sign beside it You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page e Destination The destination of the transfer job You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page e Status For ongoing transfer jobs the transfer rate
315. xt displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the fiT timecode source LTC or INT internal generator You must temporarily switch to Local and Protocol control mode to change the record channel timecode source Clip Name and location Displays the current clip s name and location in the media storage Clip system Location W newesclips Turbo iDDR User Guide 257 Chapter 5 Remote Control Control Description and User Operation Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is generated using the 16th frame of video The thumbnail image can be modified in Player Time Dome Progress fe a Progress and Available Storage 00 29 30 24 This control indicator displays record progress and available storage By default the Time Dome indicates one revolution every 10 seconds or one revolution during a fixed length recording You must switch to local control mode to change the Time Dome display then refer to Displaying available storage space on page 141 258 Turbo iDDR User Guide Remote control operation In Workstation mode Guide to AMP Player Protocol Only mode The Protocol control only mode allows you to only monitor play channel operations and view clip information All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled You can select this mode by choosing the Protocol control only option i
316. y a playlist from being deleted Clips can be edited by modifying the clip mark in and mark out points This determines the first and last frame of video when the clip plays Playlists can also be edited by moving or removing the events in the list All clips and playlists stored in the media file system are organized using bins A bin functions much like a directory in a conventional file system except bins cannot be nested that is a bin cannot contain other bins You can create name and delete bins to organize your clips and playlists There must always be at least one bin in the media file system if not the 1DDR automatically creates a bin named default As the media disk space fills you will need to manage the remaining storage space Warning messages are displayed when available storage reaches 10 total disk space All recording is halted when media storage reaches its full threshold You can manage media in the following ways e Delete unwanted assets Locate and delete unwanted clips and playlists Deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin You must empty the Recycle Bin to free the disk space e Erase unused media This is a manual operation that you can perform on individual clips This operation deletes the clip media that lies outside the clip mark in and mark out points e Clear Media File System Use this feature to permanently erase all media stored in the media file system See Clearing the media file
317. y selecting the sort by attribute for the asset list For example you can sort by name modified date length etc The Search dialog box provides both basic search and advanced search modes for locating assets anywhere in the iDDR media storage Advanced search mode allows you to define search criteria for assets based on user defined metadata The Links dialog box helps you determine assets that are related For example you can locate the source clip used to generate a subclip or you can determine if there are copies of a given clip Turbo iDDR User Guide Locating assets Topics in this section include e Sorting assets in the Asset List on page 231 e Using Basic search on page 231 e Viewing recent search results on page 234 e Using Advanced Search on page 234 e Advanced Search Criteria on page 236 e Finding linked assets on page 236 Sorting assets in the Asset List You can sort assets by file attributes such as date name length and create date using the Options dialog box To change how assets are sorted 1 Open the Options dialog box using one of the following methods e Select Clips Options or e Right click an asset then select Options in the asset context menu or e Click the Options button in the Clips Pane If the Options button is not displayed in the Clips Pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips Pane on page 214 2 Click the Sort tab in the O
318. ylist with a new name Then you can alter it without changing the original playlist To save a copy of a playlist 1 In the clips pane select the playlist 2 Copy the playlist onto the clipboard using the Edit menu or standard keyboard shortcuts 3 Paste the playlist into the clips pane A copy appears named Copy of 4 Rename the copy of the playlist load it Playlist mode and alter it to create your new playlist Renaming a playlist You can rename a playlist using the clips pane The playlist must be unloaded from the Playlist mode by creating a new playlist or opening an existing one See these related sections to rename a playlist 1 Select the playlist in the clips pane 2 Right click and select Rename 3 Use the on screen keyboard to enter and new name and click OK The renamed list appears in the clips pane Changing the playlist thumbnail image The list thumbnail image graphically identifies the list when it appears in the clips pane or when the List view is set to the thumbnail view option By default the list thumbnail is always set to the first play event s thumbnail To change the list thumbnail 1 In the List view select the first play event in the list 2 Click the Event tab to go to Event View 3 Use the front panel or onscreen transport controls to locate the video frame to be used for the new thumbnail 4 Click the Event view thumbnail image then click Yes to set this event s th

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PCI2366 User`s Manual  Manuale Utente NKR 70 GW  必要なとき  工事説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file